初中英语中考总复习大全(一)

《初中英语中考总复习大全(一)》由会员分享，可在线阅读，更多相关《初中英语中考总复习大全(一)（204页珍藏版）》请在金锄头文库上搜索。

1、目 录第一篇词法. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2一、 名词. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2二、 冠词 . . . . . .

2、. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10三、 代词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15四、 形容词、副词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3、. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27五、 连 词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44六、 介 词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4、 . . . . . . . . . . . . .51七、 数 词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65八、 动 词 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70第二篇句

5、法. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91一、 主 要 句 式 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91二、 定 语 从 句 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6、 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102三、 常见习惯用语. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106四、 完形填空与阅读. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7、. . . . . . . . . . . . .119附 录 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131中学生英语学习常见错误一览表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131A .131B .139C .145D .150E .

8、154F .157G .162H .1641.168J .170K .171L . 172M .177N .1800 .183P .185R .188S .190T .195U .198V . 200W . 200Y . 204第一篇词法一、 名词( - ) 知识概要名词一览表种类专有名词London, John, the Communist Party of China普 通 名 词 类名词 nurse, boy, worker, pencil, dog, table集体名词 class, family, army, police, team, people物质名词 water, steel

9、, glass, cotton, wood, sand抽象名词 happiness, love, work, life, courage, honest功用主语 My family is now in New York.表语 His father is a scientist.宾语 We love our great motherland.宾语补足语 He made London the base for his work.定语 The girls are making paper flowesrs.状语 The car cost him 1000 dollars.同位语 Mr Brown,

10、a famous scientist, will come here.名词在使用中的难点在于名词的数，即可数名词与不可数名词的实际应用。不可数名词不能用数字计算，所以它通常只有单数形式。它包含有专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词等，如：English,air,water,cotton,work可数名词是可以用数量加以计算的名词，所以它具有单数形式和复数形式两种。可数名词复数形式的构成规律是：L 一般情况加 s,如： penpens, doctordoctors,boyboys,其读音规则是在清辅音后读 s , 在元音和浊辅音后读 z 。如: mapmap , boyboys.2 .在以s,sh,ch

11、,x结尾的名词后面加e s ,如：bus一buses,class一classes,其读音为 iz o3 . 以ce,se,ze,(d)ge结尾的名词加s , 其读音为 iz 。4 . 以辅音字母加y 结尾的名词，要将y 变为i 再加e s ,读 作 z , 如：factory一factories,country一countries, family一families.但要注意的是以元音字母加 y 结尾的名词的复数形式只加s , 如: boyboys,day一days。5 . 以 。 结尾的名词的复数形式一般要加es,但如果。 前面是元音字母或外来词，缩写词以 o 结尾的则只加 s , 如：tom

12、ato一tomatoes,hero一heroes;photo一photos,radio一radios,piano一pianos6 . 以f 或fe结尾的名词的复数形式要将f 或fe变为v 再加es,如: knife一knives,leaf一leaves,但有些例外的词如roof的复数形式是roofs07 . 不规则名词的复数形式是要单个记忆的，它没有规律可循，如: manmen,womanwomen, childchildren, footfeet,toothteeth, mousemice8 . 单复同形的名词有: fish, sheep,deer9 . 单数形式但其意为复数的名词有: pe

13、ople,police等。 名词还有格的变化，其主格可作主语，宾格可作宾语。还有所有格，用来表示人或物的所有，以及领属关系。表示有生命的名词的所有格其单数形式是加k 其复数形式是s , 如其结尾不是 s 的复数形式仍加s,如： a students room, students1 rooms, Childrens D ay.在表示时间、距离、世界、国家 名词的所有格要用s , 如： a twenty minutes,walk.但无生命名词的所有格则必须用of结构，： the capital of our country, thecolour of the flowers（ 二）正误辨析 误Pl

14、ease give me a paper. 正Please give me a piece of paper. 析不要认为可以数的名词就是可数名词，这种原因是对英语中可数与不可数名词的概念与中文中的能数与不能数相混淆了，所以造成了这样的错误，因paper在英语中是属于物质名词一类， 是不可数名词。 而不可数名词要表达数量时，要用与之相关的量词来表达，： two pieces of paper. 误Please give me two letter papers. 正Please give me two pieces of letter paper. 析paper作为纸讲是不可数名词，而作为报纸

15、、考卷、文章讲时则是可数名词， 如：Each student should write a paper on what he has learnt. 误 My glasses is broken. 正 My glasses are broken. 误I want to buy two shoes. 正I want to buy two pairs of shoes. 析 英语中glasses一眼镜， shoes一鞋， trousers一裤子等由两部分组成的名词一般要用复数形式。如果要表示一副眼镜应用a pair of glasses而这时的谓语动词应与量词相一致。如：This pair of

16、glasses is very good. 误 May I boiTow two radioes? 正May I boiTow two radios? 析以。结尾的名词大都是用加es来表示其复数形式， 但如果。 前面是一个元音字母或外来语时则只加s 就可以了。这样的词有zoo一zoos,piano一pianos. 误This is a Marys dictionary. 正This is Marys dictionaiy. 析如名词前有指示代词this, that, these those,及其他修饰词our,some, every,which,或所有格时，则不要再加冠词。 误 There a

17、re much people in the garden. 正 There are many people in the garden. 析 可数名词前应用many, few, a few, a lot o f 来修饰， 而 people是可数名词,而且是复数名词，如：The people are planting trees here. 误I want a few water. IE I want a little water. 析不可数名词前可以用a little, little, a lot of, som e来修饰，但不可用many,few来修饰。 误Thank you very mu

18、ch. Ybur family is very kind to me. 正 Thank you very much. Ybur family are very kind to me. 误 Tom*s and Marys family are waiting for us. 正 Toms and Marys families are waiting for us. 误Fm sorry. I have to go. Tom*s families are waiting for me. 正Im sorry. I have to go. Toms family are waiting for me.

19、析集合名词如果指某个集合的整体，则应视为单数，如指某个集合体中的个体则应视为复数。如: My family is a big family. When I came in, Tom*s familywere watching TV .即汤姆一家人正在看电视。这样的集合名词有：family class,team 等。 误 D ont eat too much meats. 正 D ont eat too much meat. 误Food in that restaurant is very good. 正 The food in that restaurant is very good. 析物质

20、名词是不可数名词，在使用中不可以加s , 即它没有复数形式。也不可加不定冠词。但如果用于特指某一物质时可以加定冠词。如：I don*t likedrinking coffee, but the coffee in that cup is really good. 误Please give me two waters. 正Please give me two glasses of water. 正Please give me two coffees. 析 物质名词如要加计量时， 一定要加量词， 如： two cups of tea,two glassesof water,a glass of m

21、ilk,a loaf of bread,a piece of bread,a box of sugar,a bowl of rice,a bottle of orange,a bag of earth彳 列 ： Ill tell you a piece of good news.但只有 coffee 可, 以用 coffees 来取代 many cups of coffee. 误 Can you give me the newspaper of today? 正 Can you give me todays newspaper? 析力 s 构成所有格的名词一般应指有生命的人或物。如：Mary

22、hair,但在英文的习惯用法中对时间、距离等名词的所有格多用s来构成而不用of结构。如：a five minutes1 walk. 误Please make a room for the lady in the school bus. 正Please make room for the lady in the school bus. 析英语中更多的名词是含有多种用法和多种含意的, 误 There is a flowers garden behind my house. 正 There is a flower garden behind my house. 析名词除了在句中作主语、宾语、表语外，

23、还可以用来修饰另一个名词，这时作修饰词的名词一般要用单数形式，如：shoe factory （ 鞋厂） , post office（ 邮局） , evening paper （ 晚报） , night school （ 夜校） , head master （ 校长） , a law school （ 法律学院） 。但也有例外，如: a goods train（ 货车） , sports meeting （ 运动会） 。 误 My mother bought two fishes fbr supper this morning. 正 My mother bought two fish for s

24、upper this morning. 析英语中有些名词单复同形，如：fish, deer, sheep, Chinese means（ 方法） 。所以应讲 one fish, two fish, one Chinese, two Chinese.如果讲 There arefive fishes in the pool.应译为池中有五种鱼而不是五条鱼。 误 Mary expressed her thank to her boy friend. 正 Mary expressed her thanks to her boy friend. 析英语中有些名词只有复数形式，如： thanks, g r

25、ee n s,而有些词单数形式与复数形式有不同的词意。如: clothes为衣服，而 cloth则是布， sand沙子,而 sands是沙滩。 误I offered my son my congratulation on his success. IE I offered my son my congratulations on his success. 析英语中表示祝贺的词虽有单数形式，但一般要用其复数形式。如握手为shake hands. 误 We have five German in this meeting. 正 We have five Germans in this meetin

26、g. 析英国人Englishman的复数形式为Englishmen,而 German则要加s , 因为它不是由国名与man的组合词。 误There are two As in this word. 正There are two As in this word. 析在大写字母缩写形式的复数表达法中应加s , 但如字母是A、I 时，为了防止与As和Is相混，则要用I 即A，s, Fs 误 There are three 6s and two 3s in my telephone number. 正 There are three 6*s and two 3s in my telephone num

27、ber. 析在小写字母与数字的复数形式表达法中要用，s 误 We have many woman teachers in our school. 正 We have many women teachers in our school. 析一般组合名词变为复数形式时只将词中心词变为复数如：half brother一half brothers（ 同父异母或同母异父的兄弟,daughter in law一daughtersin law,（ 儿媳） 但要注意的是：man driver一men drivers（ 男司机）womandoctorwomen doctors（ 女大夫） grown up一gr

28、own ups（ 成年人）但是 boy student一则变为 boy students 误Physics are very difficult to learn. 正Physics is very difficult to learn. 析 虽以s 结尾但只能用作单数名词有： 科学， 学科名字： Physics. Mathematicspolitics游戏名称：bowls专有名称：Niagara Falls（ 尼亚加拉瀑布） 其他名词：news（ 消息，新闻） 误 There is a people in the room. 正 There is a person in the room.

29、正 There is a man in the room. 析 people是复数名词， 不可用作单数， 如要用来讲一个人时应用a person, aman, a woman0 同样的词有police.要讲一个警察时则要用a policeman, apolicewoman o 误Where is my shoe? 正 Where are my shoes? 析 常常只用作复数形式的词有trousers, pants, shorts（ 短裤） ， socks（ 袜子） , shoes,gloves（ 手套） 。但如果只找其中的一个则要指明，这时还是应用单数形式。如：Wheres my left

30、glove?（ 我左手的手套在哪? ） 误I paid five pennies for the sweet. 正I paid five pence for the sweet. 析英语中便上有两个复数形式pence用来表达一定数量的钱。而 pennies是指一个个的硬币，如： I want to change this note for pennies. 我想把这纸币换成硬币。（ 即一便士一个的硬币） 。 误 There are many fruit in the shop. 正 There are many fruits in the shop. 析物质名词为不可数名词，但是用来表示种类时

31、则可以用作可数名词，这里应译为各种各样的水果。 误There is a new car. It is Jones and Mary*s. 正There is a new car. It is Jone and Marys. 析有生命名词的所有格，如果是单数名词则加s如：Mary、car.如果是以s结尾的复数名词则只在s 后面加 如1： teachers， offices.如果是复数名词但不是以s 结尾，则只加 s , 如：children palace组合名词的所有格是在最后一个词尾 力 s 如：girl friend 一girl friends someone elsesomeone els

32、es a week or three一a week or threefs 如名词后有同位语时, 则应加在同位语的词尾上， 如： It is mygirl friend, Mary、ca匚要注意的是当两个名词并列时，如表示归两人共同所有，则在最后一个名词后面加3如果表示分别所有则在两个名词后分别加% 如：This is Mary and Joners home. 即Mary与Jone是一家人。这是他们共同的家。而These are Marys and Jone*s homes. 则应译为这里是 Mary 的家与 Jone 的家。 误It is really beautiful. It is a

33、work of nature. 正It is really beautiful. It is a Natures work. 析无生命g 词的所有格应用。 f 结构。但是s形式的所有格可用于以下无生命的名词：表示时间的词: todays newspaper, a twenty minutes1 walk, an hours,rest 表示长度的词：three metres1 distance, a boats length, twenty miles* journey表示重量的名词： two pounds* weight价格名词： two dollarsworth拟人化的名词：Natures

34、work, natures lesson（ 大自然的教训| ） 及国家、机关、团体、 城市等机构性名词：the universitys library 误 He is an old friend of my father. 正 He is an old friend of my fathers. 析 这是英语中的一种习惯用法而不要根据语法去推理。 如： This pen is Toms. 误 My father is a good cooker. 正 My father is a good cook. 析一般动词加上e r 后则转意为执行该动作的执行者，如: teach（ 教） 一teache

35、r（ 老师） ,think（ 想） 一 thinker（ 思想家） ,drive（ 开车） 一 driver（ 司机） , sell（ 卖） 一seller（ 卖物者） 但不能总是以此类推，比如cook是动词“ 做饭” 。而cook也可作为名词“ 厨师” 讲，而 cooker则为厨具，餐具，即锅、碗、勺等做饭用具。 误 The young is dancing there. 正 The young are dancing there. 析 英文中用定冠词加上形容词表示一类人时应按复数名词， 如： the rich富人, the poor（ 穷人） , the wise聪明人，但如果用定冠词加形

36、容词来表示事物则要用作单数名词，如：The beautiful is st如here, 美丽的风景依旧。 误 The stories of the book was written many years ago. 正 The stories of the book were written many years ago. 析这句话的真正主语应是stories,所以应用复数谓语动词。 误This is one of the English Chinese dictionary. 正 This is one of the English Chinese dictionaries. 析oneof意为

37、“ 之一” ，of后面的名词要用复数形式。 误 Lets go to uncle Wang for supper. 正Lets go to uncle Wangs for supper. 析uncle Wangrs 意为“ 王叔叔家” ，doctors意为“ 医院或私人诊所” 。 误I think we will make a friend with each other. 正I think we will make friends with each other. 析make friends为习惯用法, 即交朋友。 误I want to tell you much pieces of goo

38、d news. 正I want to tell you many pieces of good news. 析news为不可数名词，但加了量词之后则要用many来修饰量词，因量词是可数名词，或可以说I want to tell you some good news.因som e即可用在可数名词前，也可用在不可数名词前作形容词，如：I want to tell you some pieces ofgood news. 误 The teacher with five students are coming here. 正 The teacher with five students is comi

39、ng here. 析要注意由with引出的介词短语不是本句的主语，这与连词and有很卞的区别，如：The teacher and five students are coming here.这里由介词引出的短语仅仅是teacher的修饰语。 误 There are a lot of information here, but we dont need them. 正 There is a lot of information here, but we dont need it. 析information为不可数名词，而用作代替它的词要用it而不能用them. 误 Many a student

40、make the same mistake in the exam. 正 Many a student makes the same mistake in the exam. 析 many a 加可数名词单数，作主语时其谓语动词应用单数形式， 但其意为许多学生。 误 The children wear very good cloth to go to school today. 正The children wear very good clothes to go to school today. 析英文中cloth,clothes,clothing是易混之词：cloth是物质名词，意为“ 布”

41、 ,没有复数形式，而 clothing是指衣物的总称，也没有复数形式。clothes是指衣服， 但没有单数形式， 如： This clothing is needed in warm countries. Her clothes aremade of fine cloth . 英文中的dress则指较正规的服装，如：a school dress校服,an evening dress 晚礼服。 误I like to study the English. 正I like to study English. 析 作为一种学科名词前不要用冠词， 而作为某一特指学科则要加冠词，如：I like to s

42、tudy history. I like to study the history of America. 误 The Browns is going to visit China. 正 The Browns are going to visit China. 析定冠词加姓加s , 则意为“Brown先生一家人” 。 所以应用复数谓语动词。此句应译为：Brown先生一家将要访问中国。（ 三）例题解析1. Lucy and Lily in the same class.A. am B. is C. are D . be 答案Q 京由and连接两个单数名词作主语时应按复数名词来搭配谓语动词。2.

43、Which is the to the bus stop, please?A road B way C street D address 答案B. 析 这是考察同意词辨析，road是指较宽阔的大道，意为“ 乡间公路” ，而street意为道路两边的建筑物较高，可视为街道之意，而 way则多为要到达某地所要经过的途径， 还可引深为方式、 方法。 而 address则为“ 地址二如： Thereis a car running along the country road. I live at 105 Park street. Can you showme the way to the Natio

44、nal Museum?A little B a little C few D a few 答案A.4 . How many can you see in the picture?A tomatos B tomatoes C tomato D the tomato 答案B. 析用 How many提问时，其名词要用复数形式，而 tomato的复数要加es.5 . 一 is the meat. Please? Ten yuan a kilo.A How much B How many C How old D How long 答案A. 析亍由对话的答语可看出其问句问的是价格。钱数作为整体、价格讲时

45、，不论其值是多少都是不可数名词，要用how much提问。6 The boy*s name is James Allen Green. So his given name is.A James Allen B Allen Green C James Green D Mr. Green 答案A. 析f 英文的习惯与中文不同，中文是姓在前名字在后， 而英文则是姓在最后,其第一个名字是由父母所起的，中间的名字可能是父母、教父所起的，但都可称作given name,而姓在英文中是family name.7 Shanghai is one of the biggest in our country.A

46、city B citys C citys D cities 答案D . 析复音字母以y 结尾的单词的复数形式要把y 变成i 再加es。one o f 加名词的结构中的名词应用复数。8 Would you please pass me?A two paper B two papersC two pieces of paper D two pieces of papers 答案C. 析paper是不可数名词，如讲一张、两张纸时，要用量词piece.9 September 10th is D ay.A Teacher B Teachers C Teachefs D Teachers1 答案D ,10

47、 I only h a v e bread for lunch today.A a bit B a bit of C little D few 答案B.11 What would you like, Ann? ” “ Id like t wo.”A glass of milk B glasses of milkC glass of milks D glasses of milks 答案B.12 There isnt paper in the box. Will you go and get for me?A any, some B any, any C some, some D some, a

48、ny 答案A. 析f a n y 用于否定句与疑问句，但如果要表达说话者真心实意希望得到肯定答复时，问句中要用some而不要按一般语法规律用any.13 June 1st is.A Childrens day B childrens D ayC Childrens D ay D childrens day 答案C,14 These foreign friends are.A German B Germen C Germany D Germans 答案D .15 All the students are busy, so of them will go to the cinema.A many

49、B little C a few D few 答案1 D . 析student是可数名词，而 few用于可数名词，意为：几乎没有学生去电影院。16 There are three and seven in the picture.A deers, sheeps B deers, sheepC deer, sheep D deer, sheeps 答案C. 析deer与sheep均是单复同形的名词。17 Whose room is this? It s.A my B Kikes and John*sC our D Kike and Johns 答案D . 析因为room为单数， 所以不可能是Ki

50、ke的一间与John的一间， 应为二者共用的一间房子。二、 冠词( )知识概要冠词在英语中只有3 个词，分为两类：不定冠词a 与 a n ,定冠词the。 a 用在以辅音开始的单数名词前，an用于以元音开始的单词前。不定冠词用来表示一类事物中泛指的某一事物，而定冠词则用于特指的某一个或某些事物，可用于不可数名词、可数名词单数及可数名词复数前。( 二) 正误辨析 误This building is an university. 正This building is a university. 析a 用于以辅音音素开始的单词前，而 an用于以元音音素开始的单词前，而不是元音字母开头的单词前。univ

51、ersity的第一个音素是 j , 所以用a 而不要用 an。又如：There is a n in the word.是错句, 应为：There is an nin the word.因字母n 的发音的第一个音素是元音。要注意的还有hour因其第一个字母h 不发音，所以应该用an hour。例如：I need an hour to finish the work.It is a useful dictionary.It is a European country.I bought a used car. 误I need a umbrella because it looks like rain

52、ing. 正I need an umbrella because it looks like raining. 析 因umbrella的第一个音素是元音， 所以应用an.常用的情况有： an old man,an English teacher, an elephant, an idea, an hour ago, an honest boy 。 误Can you help me ” “ Sorry, Fm in hurry. ” 正“ Can you help me ” Sorry. Fm in a hurry. ” 析不比冠词的主要用法如下：,1 . 用来表示一类人或事物，如：She is

53、 a teacher.2 . 指某一类人或事物中的一个，如：An elephant is bigger than a horse.3 . 泛指某一人或事物，如：A man is waiting for you at the school gate.4 . 相当于“one” 的概 念 , 如：I just bought a new dictionary.5 . 其主要的难点是用在固定词组中：如：have a walk/a rest /a look又如：in a hurry匆匆忙忙make a face作鬼脸do somebody a favour 帮某人忙a number of 二 manyha

54、ve a cold （ 感冒）have a headache （ 头痛）have a break=have a rest 误I bought the dictionary yesterday. A dictionary is very good. 正I bought a dictionary yesterday. The dictionary is very good. 析在文章中第一次提到某物时用不定冠词，而第二次提到时用定冠词。 误Please turn off lights before you leave. 正Please turn off the lights before you

55、leave. 析虽然是第一次提到某物但说话双方均知其所指，也应用定冠词。 误 There are nine planets around a sun. 正 There are nine planets around the sun. 析 世上独一无二的天体等名词前应加定冠词， 如： the earth, the moon, the sun,the sky, the sea. 误I live on a second floor of this building. 正I live on the second floor of this building. 析 在序数词， 形容词最高级前要用定冠词。

56、 如: He is the oldest in the family. 误I want to learn the second language this term. 正I want to learn a second language this term. 析在序数词的含意不是顺序中的第一第二，而其意在于再学一个，再来一个时，应用a , 本句的意思应为：这学期我要学一门第二外语。 误 Mississippi is one of the longest rivers in the world. 正The Mississippi is one of the longest rivers in t

57、he world. 析在河流名称普应加定冠词，如：the Yellow Ri ver（ 黄河） 。 误Look, there are Alp. 误Look, there are the Alp. 正Look, there are the Alps. 析具体的某一座山不加定冠词，如：Mountain Tai. 但在山名称前加定冠词后， 其山名要加s , 来表示山脉。 the Alps即为阿尔卑斯山脉。如汀he Alps are inthe center of Europe. 误 Times is one of the oldest newspapers in the world. 正 The T

58、imes is one of the oldest newspapers in the world. 析报刊名称前应加定冠词。 误 Rich are not always happy. 正 The rich are not always happy., 析 在形容词前加定冠词表示一类人，而在姓的前面加定冠词，姓后加s 表示某家， 如：The turners are going to move to New York. 误I like to eat bread for breakfast. Bread sells in this shop is very good. 正I like to eat

59、 bread for breakfast. The bread sells in this shop is very good. 析物质名词特指时也应加定冠词。 . 误The sun rises in east. 正The sun rises in the east. 析 在方向、 方位前应用定冠词, 如： in the east, in the west, in the north, in thesouth, in the direction 及 in the past, in the future 误 D o you know who invented telephoneLIE D o y

60、ou know who invented the telephone 析在特定和专有事物或名称前要加定冠词，如 I： the English Channel 英吉利海峡the Panama Canal巴拿马运河the Suez Canal 苏伊士运河 误 Would you please buy some food for the supper 正 Would you please buy some food for supper 析泛指一日三餐前无定冠词。 误I like to climb the mountain in the autumn.LIE I like to climb the

61、mountain in autumn. 析一年四季前不用定冠词，如 : Spring is the best season in a year. 析 有些名词被用作其本身原来所含目的时不加冠词， 如： go to school上学,leave school（ 辍学） ，after school（ 放学） ，但如果当建筑物讲时应加冠词，如例句中其父母来校不是上学， 而是看望孩子， 则要加定冠词。 又如， He was in hospitalfor two days.（ 他在医院住院两天了。 ） 而： He went to the hospital to see his mother.他去医院看望

62、他的母亲。 误I bought a same dictionary as she bought. 正I bought the same dictionary as she bought. 析在惯用法the same, the only, the very前的定冠词不可换为不定冠词。 误The police caught the thief by his arm. 正The police caught the thief by the arm. 析这是英文表达法与中文的明显不同之处，也是初学者极易忽视之处。在英语中的某些动词， 如： catch（ 抓） ， take（ 拿） , strike （

63、 打） , pat（ 拍） ， hit（ 击） ， hold（ 握） ,pull（ 拉） 动词后应加人， 再加介词on, by, in, with之后要加定冠词， 再加人体的某一部位。这时的定冠词千万不要换作his, her, their,等词。 误 He was paid by hour. 正 He was paid by the hour. 析by和计量单位之间要有定冠词。这句话应译为：他的工资是按小时计算的。 误I went to New York by his car. 正I went to New York by car. 正I went to New York in his car

64、. 析 by仅仅与交通工具相连表示应用某种工具，而加了别的修饰词后其前面的介词也应作相应的转换。如：by car （ 坐小汽车） by taxi （ 坐出租车） by bike （ 骑自行车） by water （ 乘船） by air （ 乘飞机） by sea （ 乘船） 误 Mary began to learn how to play piano when she was three. 正 Mary began to learn how to play the piano when she was three. 析 在乐器前要加定冠词， 而在球类游戏之前则不要加冠词， 如： They

65、like toplay bridge when they are free.（ 他们空闲时爱打桥牌） 误 The little boy wanted to go to cinema. 正The little boy wanted to go to the cinema. 析英语中虽有一些名词与got。 连用时不加定冠词，以表示该名词的内涵，如：go to school （ 上学） ,go to bed（ 睡觉） 等，但去看电影则例外，要用go to thecinema.这也是语言的一个特点。 误I live at 105 the Lake street. IE I live at 105 La

66、ke Street. 析街道名称前不用冠词。 误 Next summer holiday I will go to country to live on a farm. 正 Next summer holiday I will go to the country to live on a farm. 析country既作国家讲也作乡村讲。作乡村讲时，一定要加定冠词，而且只有单数形式，作国家讲时则可有复数形式。： Japan is a country Japan, China,India are Asian countries. 误The picture looks better at the

67、distance. 正 The picture looks better at a distance. 析at a distance意为“ 离开一定距离” 。而 in the distance为 “ 远方，远处” 。这样常用的词组有：as a rule （ 照例）in a hurry （ 匆忙）in the moming/afternoon （ 上/ 下午）in the sun （ 在阳光下）in the rain （ 雨中）in the same way （ 同样）in the shade （ 在阴凉处）in the end （ 最终）on the other hand （ 换句话说）on

68、the contrary （ 相反） 误 The little boy and girl walk along the street a hand in a hand. 正The little boy and girl walk along the street hand in hand. 析这是英语中的习惯用法，如：bit by bit （ 逐渐）day after （ by） day （ 一天又一天）day and night （ 日日夜夜）face to face （ 面对面）from A to Z （ 自始至终）hand in hand （ 手拉手）shoulder by should

69、er （ 肩并肩）（ 三）例题解析1 Mr Li is old worker.A a B an C some D / 答案B. 弟an用于元音音素开始的单词前。2 English is useful language in world.A an, the B a, the C the, / D /,the 答案B. 析 因useful的第一个音素是 j , 它是辅音音素。3 What interesting book it is?A a B an C the D / 答案B. 析 这是感叹句， 因为移到原一般句前面的强调部分中有可数名词book,所以应加冠词，而 interesting的第一音

70、素是元音所以要加an。4 He will be back in hour.A / B the C a D an 答案D . 析因hour的首字母h不发音。5 There is map in the classroom. map is on the wall.A a, A B the, The C a, The D the ,A 答案C. 析在文章中首次提到某人或某物时用不定冠词，而第二次再提到该物或人时应用定冠词。6 Look at picture! T h e r e s house in it.A a ,a B the, the C a, the D the, a 答案D. 析: 虽然是第

71、一次提到，但在句中的语言是让对方看某一特定的图画，所以应选择D o7 There is orange in the bottle.A a B an C the D / 答案D. 析f这里的orange是指桔汁而不是一个个的桔子。8 Beijing is capital of our country.A the B an C / D a 答案A. 析亍capital之后有of结构则要用定冠词。9 If you work hard at English, youll get A ” in the test.A an B / C the D a 答案A. 析亍因字母A的第一音素是元音。10 He u

72、sually goes to school on foot.A a B an C the D / 答案D . 析on foot意为走路上学，是习惯用法。三、 代词(-)知识概要英语中代词可以分为人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、疑问代词、不定代词。人称代词主要有主格和宾格之别。请看下表人 称 我 你 他 她 它 我 们 你 们 他 们主格 i you he she it we you they宾格 me you him her it us you them物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词两种。请看下表人称我的你的他的她的它的我们的你们的他们的形容词性 my your his h

73、er its ours your they名词，性 mine yours his hers its ours yours theirs反身代词可见下表人 称 我 你 他 她 它 我们你们他们反身代词 myself yourself himself herself itself ourselves yourself themselves指示代词主要有this, that, these, those疑问代词有：who, whom whose, what, which,还有疑问副词 when, how, where, why。不定代词在初中课本中主要有some, any, many, much, e

74、ach, neither, other,another, all, both, one, none, either （ 二）正误辨析 误Toms mother is taller than my. 正Toms mother is taller than mine. 析 形容词性物主代词可以作定语， 也就是讲它可以作形容词， 如： my book,而这句话的意思是：汤姆的妈妈比我的妈妈高。比较的对象是my mother,也就是 mine0 误 We have a lot of homework to do today. So we need two or three hours tofinish

75、 them. 正 We have a lot of homework to do today. So we need two or three hours tofinish it. 析在应用代词时，要注意人称，格与数的一致性。这里it所代替的是不可数名词hom ew ork,所以应用it。 误 He and you should go to the library to return the books. 正 You and he should go to the library to return the books. 析这主要是英语习惯上的用法。当两个以上的人称代词并列时其排列顺序一般为y

76、ou, he, she, I,而复数时为we, you, they:如男女并列时,应先男后女，如 I： He and sh e如果在表示不好意思， 承担责任时， 单数时用， I, he, she, you,复数时用 They, you, w e,如：Tom and I are good friends.You, he and I must go to play the game for our team this afternoon.We, you and they have been there before.I, he and you have to pay fbr it. 误 He or

77、 his brother is doing their homework. 正 He or his brother is doing his homework. 析由either-or, neither,e nor, o r 连接两个主语时，如果两主语是单数时，用单数代词， 如两主语是复数时， 用复数代词， 如： Either teachers or students wantto do their best to help the old man.如是一单一复两名词时， 一般将单数名词放在前， 复数名词放在后， 要用复数代词， 如： The teacher or his students w

78、ill clean theirclassroom together. 误 His brother is taller than him. 正His brother is taller than he. 析than是连词，其后应视为省略句，than he is.所以要注意区分其主格与宾格的用法。I like you as much as she. 正I like you as much as her. 析 asa s 其后也应看作是省略句。应为as I like her.所以应用宾格。而第一句应译为我像她那样喜欢你。两句语法都是对的但含义不同。 误Myself did it yesterday.

79、 正I myself did it yesterday. 正I did it myself yesterday. 析反身代词不可作主语，但可以用作主语的同位语。 误 Take care of ourselves. 正Take care of yourselves .(yourself) 析祈始句的主语应看作第二人称you. 误Please bring your daughter with yourself. 正Please bring your daughter with you. 析 反身代词不能作介词宾语， 除非是由不及物动词与介词组成的动词短语,如： The old woman spok

80、e to herself. 误 Make yourself home. 正 Make yourself at home. 析这是英语中的习惯用法，意为“ 像在家里一样” 。这样的用法还有：enjoy oneself 玩得开心 make yourself at home 像在家中一样help yourself to something 自己拿某物 lost oneself 迷路seat oneself 就坐 dress oneself 穿衣 误一 Whos this speaking.一 Thats Mary. 正一 Whos that speaking.一 This is Mary. 析在电话

81、用语中，this指讲话人自己，而 that指对方。 误 The days in summer are longer than this in winter. 正 The days in summer are longer than those in winter. 析在比较句中往往为了避免重复，可以用that或 those取代前面提到的事物，如是单数时用 that,复数时用 those,如：The weather in Beijing is hotter thanthat in Chang Chun. 误It is so a good book that everyone likes to r

82、ead. 正It is such a good book that everyone likes to read. 正It is so good a book that everyone likes to read. 析在可数名词单数时可用so+形容词+ 不定冠词+ 名词+that从句，也可用such+不定冠词+ 形容词+that从句。 在不可数名词或可数名词复数时， 只用such,如：It is such good weather that I want to go swimming. They are such good booksthat I want to buy them all.在

83、 many, much, few, little 这 4 个词前仅能用 so,如：Shehas so much money that she can buy everything she wants. 而在 so 与 that 之间仅存形容词时，则不能用 such,如: She is so sweet that everyone likes her. 误I want to buy a same dictionary as yours. 正I want to buy the same dictionary as yours. 析 same与定冠词the是固定搭配不可更改。 这样的用法还有all

84、the same（ 仍然） 。 误 一 I hope she might pass the exam.一 I dont hope so. 正 一 I hope she might pass the exam. I hope not. 析在作肯第回答时，I think so. I hope so. I believe so. 但作否定回答时为：Idont think so. I hope/believe not. 误 He studied very hard this term. So she did. 正 一 He studied very hard this term.一 So did sh

85、e. 误 一 English is difficult to learn. So is it. 正 一 English is difficult to learn. So it is. 析在对话中如果某一动作同时适用于两个主语，这时在答语中要用缩写且要用倒装句。如第一组句，即 studied hard既适用于he,也适用于she.但答语仅仅是对前句的重复，即仅仅是第一句的缩写时则不要用倒装句。如第二组句子为：英语难学。答语为：是的，难学。这时缩写的答语不要用倒装句。 误Everyone should do ones best. 正 Everyone should do his best. 析o

86、ne作代词时，它的复数形式是ones,所有格形式是one、 反身代词为oneself.如果讲One should do ones best.则是对句。如果one与别的词组成其他词，如： someone, anyone, everyone 或 only one 则要用 his/her,来作其所有格形式。 误一 Who won the game?一 None. 正 一 Who won the game?一 No one. 析 由who提问的句子的否定回答中的简略说法是no one,而由How many提问的句子的否定回答中的简略语是None.如：How many books are there?

87、None. 误 There are many trees on either sides of the street. 正 There are many trees on either side of the street. 正 There are many trees on both sides of the street. 析 either作代词时由两个含意， 其一是两者中随便哪一个， 如： You can takeeither.其二是两者中的每一个。但要注意的是either后要加单数名词，如果作主语则谓语动词也要用单数形式。 误 Either you or I are right. 正

88、Either you or I am right. 析在 eitheror,或 neither nor连接两个主语时,其谓语动词要与和其相近的那个主语相配。 误I have three sisters. Neither of them is a doctor. 正I have three sisters. None of them is a doctor. 析 neither用于两者中无一是， 而 none则用于多于两者中的人或事物无一是。 误 He doesn*t like Beijing opera. I dont like too.LIE He doesnt like Beijing o

89、pera, I dont like either. 析either作为“ 也”讲时，要用于否定句中，而 t。 。则用于肯定句中。 误We like both this little boy. 正We both like this little boy. 析both作同位语时，它在句中的位置有：在 be动词之后，如：We are bothstudents. 在实意动词之前，如：The parents both want to go to the cinema用于第一助动词之后，如：We have both read these English novels.使用时要注意以下句子的实际含意：Bot

90、h of us are not right.应译为：我们俩不都对。Neither of us isright.才应译为：我俩都不对。又如：I carft give you both of th6 books.意为：两本书我不能全给你， 而 I cant give you either of the books.才为： 两本书我全不能给你。 -一 误 We each has a ticket for the concert. 正 We each have a ticket for the concert. 析 each作句子主语时其谓语动词要用单数形式， 如： Each of us wants

91、to leamEnglish w ell,但 each作同位语时，则应以原名词的数为准。 误 Every of us has to pass the exam. 正Each of us has to pass the exam. 析every只可作形容词，不可作代词，而 each既可作形容词，又可作代词，在作形容词时each侧重强调个体，而every则侧重于全体。 误 Everyone of us should do housework two hours a day. 正 Every one of us should do housework two hours a day. 析everyo

92、ne不可与of结构相连接使用，而every one则可以这样用。 误I should read English everyday. 正I should read English every day. 析要注意的是every day是 “ 每天 ，而everyday则是形容词为“ 日常的” 。如：everyday English 日常英语，everyday life 日常生活。 误 There are trees on every sides of the street. 正 There are trees on each side of the street. 析every用于三者或三者以上的

93、每一个，而 each用于二者或二者以上的每一个。因为街道只有两侧，所以只能用each而不能用every. 误 All my parents are engineers. 正Both my parents are engineers. 析all用于三者或三者以上的全部，而 both则用于两者的全部。 误 All of students might make some mistakes. 正 All of the students might make some mistakes. 正 All students might make some mistakes. 析非特指的名词前可用all但不可用

94、all of结构，也就是讲all of结构后面的名词前一定要有定冠词。其他与all有关的习惯用法还有：all the year round, all week, all day, all winter 误The all village was flooded. 正All the village was flooded. 析all作修饰语时要用在所有修饰词之前。 误 The post office is on other side of the street. 正 The post office is on the other side of the street. 析 单数可数名词如在泛指某一

95、个时用another,而特指时则要用the other,因街道只有两边，而不在这边必定是在另一边，所以要用特指。请参考下表的用法以便于记忆。单数复数泛 指 another形容词作定语作名词another 代词 other others特 指 the other形容词the other 代词the other the others 误 There are ten students here Where are the others students? 正There are ten students here.Where are the others? 正There are ten student

96、s here Where are the other students? 析the others=the other students. 误 The old man has two sons. One is a teacher, another is a doctor. 正 The old man has two sons. One is a teacher, the other is a doctor. 析another 用于泛指，如：Is it far from here to the station?Fm sorry. I have noidea. One may say it is q

97、uite near; another may say it is far from here.但在特指时贝U要用the other.它可以用作定语，the other one,也可以用作代词the otherjfi theother用作代词时它的含意一定是单数。如果指三者或者三者以上的情况时，则要用 one-another-the othe匚或者 one-a second-the third, 误Some people like sports. The others like reading. 正Some people like sports. Others like reading. 析在泛

98、指的复数名词前用someothersothers来表示某些人. . .某些人某些人。 误Please remember to water the flowers each other day. 正Please remember to water the flowers every other day. 析 every other day为每隔一天。 是习惯用法， 不要随意改动。 又如： on the otherhand另一方面。 误 Many know him, but few likes him. 正 Many know him, but few like him. 析few用于可数名词，意

99、为几乎没有，但 few作主语时谓语动词则要用复数形式，而 a few为有一些。 误 You have few friends, haven*t you? 正 You have few friends, have you? 析little与 few用于句中时，均要按否定句看待。 误 Much of what you said are true. 正 Much of what you said is true. 析much用于不可数名词，作主语时用单数谓语动词。而 many用于可数名词，它作主语时用复数形式的谓语动词。 误 This room is enough large fbr the stu

100、dents to live in. 正 This room is large enough for the students to live in. 析 enough 可以用作代词, 如： There is enough of the food.又如： Enough hasbeen done for the w ork,但 enough还可以作形容词来修饰名词，这时enough可以放在名词之前，也可放在名词之后，如：money enough与enough money都是对的。但当enough作副词修饰形容词时，则只能置于形容词之后了。 误I want any books to read. D

101、o you have any? 正I want some books to read. D o you have any? 析按照语法any用于疑问句和否定句，而 some用于肯定句。 误 Would you like any thing to drink? 正 Would you like something to drink? 析 在由would you like发出的问句中， 表达了说话者真心实意要为对方提供些饮料，或在说话者想得到对方的肯定答复时，在疑问句中要用some而不用any。 误Someone want to meet you. 正Someone wants to meet y

102、ou. 析不定代词应被看作单数，即使用and连接两个不定代词，也要看作单数,如： Anyone and everyone has the right.任何人，每一个人都有这样的权力。 误 New York is much colder in winter than before. 正It is much colder in New York in winter than before. 析i t 常常用在英文的句子中来代表时间、距离、天气、自然现象，或用在句中作形式主语或宾语，如：It is ten oclock now.（ 代时间）It is far from here to the air

103、port.（ 代 星 巨 离 ）It is very hot.（ 代天气）It is very difficult to learn English well.（ 作形式主语）We found it very difficult to answer the question.（ 作形式宾语） 误Be careful. D on*t drink too many. 正Be careful. D on*t drink too much. 析这里much所代的应是饮料或水，所以应为不可数名词。（ 三）例题解析1 These are books. Yours are over there.AI B m

104、y C me D mine 答案B, 析这里应用形容词性物主代词。2 一 is she?一 She is a teacher.A What B How C Who D Where 答案A. 析这里的四个疑问词放在问句中全都成立，但其意义不同。What is she?应译 为 “ 她的工作是什么？ ”或 “ 她是做什么的？ ”而 How is she?应译为“ 她身体如何？ ” 而Who is she?应译为 她是谁？ ” 其答语应为“ 她叫什么名字。 ” 而 Whereis she?应 为“ 她在什么地方？ ”由答语决定了这道题的选择。3 is wrong with my watch. It

105、has s t o p p e d .A Something, working B Something, to workC Any thing, working D Anything, to work 答案A. 析因为是肯定句所以应用Something,其后由于表停止工作了，则 stop后要用动名词。4 Mary, help to the bananas, please.A you B your C yourself D yourselves 答案C . 析help oneself to something 为 “ 自己拿某物 。yourself 为 “ 你一个人” , 而yourselves

106、 为 你们5 一 do you go to school every day?一 By bus.A How B Why C When D Where 答案A. 析这题的答案是由问句决定的。6 My skirt is popular t ha n.A much, her B much, hers C more, her D more, hers 答案D , 析因句中有than,所以应选用比较级，而 than后要选用名词性物主代词。7 - Can you speak English?一 Yes, but onl y.A few B a few C little D a little 答案D. 析

107、因会讲某种语言的多少要用a little,把它看作不可数名词对待， 此答语为:是的，但仅仅会讲一点。8 Mr. Smith is an old friend of.A I B me C my D mine 答案D. 析这里应选名词性物主代词，这也是英语的一种习惯用法，而不要选择my。9 do you hear from your parents? ”“ About once a month.,A How long B How manyC How often D How much 答案C. 析How often问的是某一动作发生的频率，即在单位时间内发生多少次。10 Mr Green would

108、nt say at the meeting.A everything B nothing C anything D something 答案C. 析在否定句中应用anything11 Mum, Ann*s coming tonight. Lets give her to eat.v“Good idea!”A anything nice B nice anythingC something nice D nice something 答案C. 析肯定句中用something而不用anything,不定代词的修饰词应放其后而不要放在其前面。12 - When shall we meet, this

109、 evening or tomorrow evening?A Some B Neither C Either D Both 答案c, 言因如选用both则名词要用复数名词，也要用复数谓语动词，由于答语前有 I dont m ind则决定不能选择neither.13 This is not her kite, but .A hes B him C he D his 答案D , 析要注意“ 他的”名词性物主代词与形容词性物主代词是同形的。14 D ont worry, Mum! news is good news. Im sure daddy will come backsoon.A No B M

110、any C Those D Two 答案A. 析这是一条谚语，即没有消息就是好消息。15 Mary has six apples. Her brother has three. She has apples than he.A few B many C more D fewer 答案Q 行由于是比较级，根据题意应选“ 多于”而不是“ 少于” 。16 There isnt in todays newspaper.A anything interestingB something interestingC nothing interestingD interesting anything 答案A.

111、 一 析由于句子是否定句，应选择anything,而且不定代词的修饰语应放在其后面。17 September 10th is D ay?A Teacher B Teachers C Teachers D Teachers1 答案D , 析教师节 TeachersD ay,儿童节 Childrens Day,妇女节 Womens D ay18 - In England, people eat a lot of “takeaway food. What about people in yourcountry?A So we do. B We do so. C So do we. D We so d

112、o. 答案Q 京在答语中用简略方式表达上文的一个动作同样适用于另一个主语时，则要采用倒装句，但如果仅仅是对上句的重复则不要倒装。19 - Shall we go into that shop and have a look?一 Sorry. I wonthave to do there.A everything B anything C something D nothing 答案D , 析这个答案的选择应由上下两句对话内容作出决定。20一 Oh, dear! Who broke the glass? Sam Bruce. It was the cat.A Both, and B Not, b

113、ut C Neither, nor D Either, or 答案c. 析neithernor意为既不. . .也不. . .A Others B Other C Another D The other 答案A. 析这里因为是代替复数名词，所以应用名词性的复数代名词。22 She is not a nurse. Pm not .A also B either C neither D too 答案B. 析在否定句中该用either,而不用too和 also.23 I have two pencils. One is r ed, is blue.A the other B another C ot

114、hers D the others 答案A. 析 两者中的另一个应为特指。 而且应为单数形式的代名词。 而 another是泛指单数代名词。others是泛指复数代名词，而 the others是特指复数代名词。24 Sorry, I cant answer your question.I know about the subject.A little B a little C few D a few 答案A.m 中文讲我对此知道的不多，而英文中要用little。其含意为否定句。25 My sister doesnrt like s k a t i n g .A So do I B So I

115、don*tC Neither I dont D Neither do I 答案D , 析这是表达上面否定句中的动作，也同样不适合于第二个人。所以要用neither,并要采用倒装句。26 Yesterday morning there were only three boys in our r o o m, .A you, he and I B I, you and heC he, I and you D you, I and he 答案A, 箱这是若干人称代词并列时的顺序问题。请参看辨析中的例子。27 All the students are busy, so of them will go

116、to the concert.A many B little C a few D few 答案D , 析student为可数名词。28 The teacher gave student a new book.A nobody B both C each D any 答案C, 析 both其后的名词应为复数，而 any用于疑问句和否定句中只有each可以修饰单数可数名词。29 Black is neither a teacher a worker.A or B either C nor D and 答案C. 析neither-nor “ 既不. . .也不. . .”的固定搭配。30 Our t

117、eacher gave us on studying.A many advices B some advicesC an advice D some advice 答案D . 析advice为不可数名词。some可用于可数或不可数名词之前。31 There are two foreign friends in the park. One is from Japan, is fromAmerica.A other B others C the other D the others 答案c. 析因为是两者中的一个，所以另一个应用单数特指代词。32 Are there on the table?A

118、some cups B any cup C some cup D any cups 答案D . 析此句是疑问句，应用any cups,因提问时的be动词用的是are。33 Ive just bought five stamps. One is a German stamp, are Americanstamps.A the other B the others C other D others 答案B. 析此空应填入主语。又因其范围已定，所以应选特指的代名词。the other只能用作单数，而 。 thers是泛指复数代名词，故只能选B。34 It was fine day that they

119、 went to the park.A a so B so a C such a D a such 答案c. 析在单数可数名词前可以有两种表达法，即 such+不定冠词+ 形容词+ 可数名词单数形式，如：such a good d a y ,或者用so加形容词+ 不定冠词+ 可数名词单数, 如：so good a day.A little B a little C few D a few 答案Q 析这是英文的表达法与中文不同之处。中文讲只有少数人喜欢坐火车，英文要选用“few”。36 We must help and understand e a c h.A other B another C

120、 others D the other 答案A. 析each other意为“ 互相” ，是习惯用语。37 is difficult to walk on the moon.A Man B One C That D It 答案D . 析这里的真正主语应为不定式to walk on the moon.而形式主语只能用it.38 Jane has sent several letters, but of them have been answered.A all B both C either D none 答案D . 析several letters意为 若干信件 ， 应看作多于两者，则在A、

121、D中作选择，仅 D符合句意。39 I dont know about the new headmaster.A something B everything C nothing D anything 答案D . 析否定句中应用anything.40 of the students in the whole class could do this physics question.A No B None C Not D Neither 答案B.四、 形容词、副词( )知识概要形容词的用法很活跃，在英语中用处也很多，但英语中修饰可数名词和不可数名词的修饰语和词组有时不同，要特别加以注意。下面将初中

122、学习阶段中遇到的修饰可数名词的词和词组归纳如下：many, no, several, some, a few, a lot, lots,plenty, plenty of, a lot of, a large number of, enougho 而修饰不可数名词的词或词组如下：much, no, some, a lot, a great deal, lots, plenty, a lot of, plenty ofo 其中some, no, a lot of, plenty of既可修饰可数名词又可修饰不可数名词。 英语中形容词与副词有原级、比较级、最高级之分，其规则如下：构词法原级比较级最

123、高级 加 e r ,或estTallyoung talleryoungertallestyoungest只加r 或 st nicelargenicerlargernicestlargest重读闭音节末尾只有一个辅音 字母时双写该字母加er、est bigfathotbiggerfatterhotterbiggestfattesthottest不规则变化的形容词或副词：原级比较级最高级good better bestWell better bestbad worse worstbadly worse worstmany more mostmost more mostlittle less les

124、tfar fartherfurtherfarthestfurthestold olderelderoldesteldest要注意的是许多形容词同时又是副词，如：back, all, alone, either, far, high, slow等。而有些形容词则要经过一定变化才能转为副词，其规律如下：构 词 法 形 容 词 副 词一般加 ly Carefulkindcarefullykindly尾 是y时将y变 成i加ly HappybusyeasyHappilybusilyeasily其 他trueterriblefullpossibleshywholetrulyterriblyfullypo

125、ssiblyshylywholly在学习过程中要注意其变化。此外并不是所有副词都可以修饰比较级和最高级形容词。育 m修饰比较级的有：much, yet, far, still, a great deal, even 和 a little.能修饰最高级的有：the very,much the, far 等。（ 二）正误辨析 误 The young likes playing football very much. 正 The young like playing football very much. 析 定冠词加形容词表示一类人， 应作复数看待。 而定冠词加形回词表示抽象事物时则要看作单数，如

126、：The beautiful is not always kindness.美丽并不总代表善良。 误 The danger has gone, so the worst are over. 正 The danger has gone, so the worst is over. 析 意为：” 危险已经过去，最困难的状况已结束。” 用定冠词加最高级形容词作主语时应看作单数形式。 误 It is the gold age of the young. 正 It is the golden age of the young. 析 golden在英语中多用于比喻，如：golden hair金发，guld

127、en voice金嗓子。而gold多用于表达金质的，如：a gold bar金条, a gold coin金币，但 goldfish金鱼例外。 误 She is a warm heart woman. 正 She is a warm hearted woman. 析 英语形容词的构词法很多，其中之一是由形容词，或数词，加名词加6d构成，如： warm hoarted热心肠的，white haired白毛的 误 There is an alive fish in the pool. 正 There is a living fish in the pool. 析 在初中范围内所学到的以a 字母开头

128、的形容词一般不能作定语， 只能作表语。 如： The fish is alive.（ 鱼还活着） 这样的形容词有： alive, alike, alone, asleep,afraid, awake 等。 误 The ill man nearly died. 正 The sick man nearly died. 析 ill 一般不作定语来形容某人有病，而要用sick,但作表语时则都可以。如：He is ill sick, ill作定语时则另有他意,如：ill luck （ 厄运） ,ill nature（ 天性恶劣） , ill temper（ 心绪不好） 误 I have importan

129、t something to tell you. 正 I have something important to tell you. 析 不定代词something, anyone, somebody在用形容词修饰时，形容词应放其后。但要注意thing则不是不定代词，不符合上述规律。如：I have animportant thing to tell you. 误 ril be free on next Sunday. 正 ril be free next Sunday. 析在表达将来时的时候： next Sunday, next week, next year 或 last Sunday l

130、astweek, last year前都不加介词。 误 The girl is two year old. 正 The girl is two years old. 正 She is a two year old girl 析由连字符连接若干名词、 数词组成的形容词， 在学习时要记住两点，其一是这些词中的名词都不要用复数形式, 如: two thousand word report（ 两千字的报告） ；其二是这样构成的形容词只能作定语，即用于名词之前，而不能作表语。 误 The foreigners like those little beautiful Chinese paintings.

131、正 The foreigners like those beautiful little Chinese paintings. 析 在名词前若有几个形容词作修饰语时，其顺序如下。1 .指示代词， 定冠词2 .数量词3. 性质词4 .大小 5 .形 状 6 .老少， 新 旧 7.颜 色 8 .材料但要注意的是英语的习惯是一个名词前的形容词一般不要多于三个。如： What a pretty little white horse!Those first few short English stories were not difficult to understand. 误 The best way

132、 to learn English good is to speak with Englishman every day. 正 The best way to learn English well is to speak with Englishman every day. 析 good是形容词，这里是修饰动词speak的，所以应用副词w ell,但 well作形容词讲时只作身体好。如：He is well.（ 他身体很好） 。He is good. （ 他是个好人） 。 误 The children play on the grass nappyly. 正 The children play

133、 on the grass happily 析 多音节y 结尾的形容词变为副词时应将y 变为i 再加ly. 误 The teacher looked angry at the students. 正 The teacher looked angrily at the students. 析 英语中感观动词后面要接形容词，这时它是修饰主语的，如：The foodsmells good. 食物闻起来很香。The teacher looked angry老师看起来很生气。而此句的意思为：” 老师生气地看着学生” ，所以应用副词形式。 误 He worked with me friendly. 正 H

134、e was friendly to me. 析 不是所有结尾是ly 的词都是副词， 但 friendly是形容词， 这样的词还有lovely, lonely, costly, lively*monthly weekly。 但其中有些词既是副词， 又是形容词，如：early, hourly, monthly- 误 You can speak free in front of your friends. 正 You can speak freely in front of your friends. 析 free作为形容词意为“ 自由的，有空闲的，免费的” 。作为副词讲则是”免费” 之意。而 fr

135、eely作为副词则是“ 自由的，随便的” 。这些要注意的词还有：hard努力， 艰 苦 hardly几乎不late迟， 晚lately最近的， 最新的near近nearly 几乎 like 像 likely 几乎 误 They must have arrived till now. 正 They must have arrived by now. 析 by now是用于表达到目前为止某一动作己经发生，所以应用瞬间动词。而 till now是强调某一动作一直持续到现在， 所以一定要用持续性动词。 musthave+过去分词是对过去某一事情所作的肯定推测。 误 正Someone called yo

136、u right now.Someone called you just now. 析 just now有两个意思，其一是 刚才“ ，其二是“ 现在 ，而 right now只能用于现在的状态。 just则用于完成时态，如： I have just finished my homework. 误 正My father will be back from America at present.My father will be back from America presently. 析 presently有两个意思：其一是最近，不久，其二在美语中是现在之意,与 at present 相同。 而

137、for the present 为暂时， 如：I teach English in the school forthe present. 误 ril be back at the moment. 正 Ill be back in a moment. 析 at the moment其意为 现在，当时” ，而 in a moment意为 马上过一会” ，与 in a minute意思相近。 误 I had met an old friend three days ago. 正 I had met an old friend three days before. 正 I met an old fri

138、end three days ago.* ago用在时间状语中时，主句中谓语动词一般用过去时，而 before用于时间状语时则主句的谓语动词宜用完成时态。 误 He studied very hard, and at the end he passed the exam. 正 He studied very hard, and in the end he passed the exam. 析 in the end= at last意为 最终， 终于” ， 表达经过若干努力而达到的结果。而 at the end是在某事的结束时如何如何， 如： At the end of class, the t

139、eacher gaveus some story books o 误 I will come here to help you each three days. 正 I will come here to help you every three days. 析 every three days为“ 每三天” ，即每隔二天，而 every other day为每隔一天。 误 He didnt go to the cinema yesterday, and I didnt go, too. 正 He didnt go to the cinema yesterday and I didnt go

140、either. 析 英语中表示“ 也” ，有 4 个字, also, as well, too, either,但 either用于否定句中，而前3 个用于肯定句中。在肯定句中too与 as well一般要用在句尾，而 also 则可用于句中。如： She went to the party and her boy friend went there too.又如： Ive also read her other novels. 误 We should help the poor girl in anyway. 正 We should help the poor girl in any way

141、. 析anyway 为“ 不管怎么 讲， 无论如何 ， 如： What a temble accident, anywayno one was hurt.any w ay为“ 任何方式” 。这种常见的错误还发生在以下几组词中，如：everyday 日常的 everyday 每天faraway遥远的far away远离altogether 总计 all together 一块，大家一起already已经all ready全准备好了 误 She said nearly nothing. 正 She said almost nothing. 析 nearly与 almost的含意相近，在很多场合可以

142、互换，但在否定词前用almost o 误 There are too much mistakes in your homework. 正 There are too many mistakes in your homework. 析too much 后接不可数名词， 如： There is too much water for the flowers.而too many后加可数名词， much to o 后面加形容词， 如： It is much too difficult tolearn English well. 误 It is late enough that we can go hom

143、e now. 正 It is late enough for us to go home now. 析 要注意的是enough后面一般不接从句而接不定式，或不定式的复合结构： for somebody to do something o 误 The twins are very alike. 正 The twins are much alike. 析 用 a 为首字母的形容词不能用very修饰，一般要用much来修饰。 误 - How long does he write to his parents?- Once a week. 正 - How often does he write to

144、his parents?- Once a week. 析 英文与中文表达法不同，隔多长时间办一次某事， 实际上问的是该事发生的频率，所以要用howoften。 误A s soon as I arrive in New York, Ill call up you. 正A s soon as I arrive in New York, Ill call you up. 析 当动词词组的宾语是人称代词时则一定要放于动词之后， 如果是名词则可以放在词组其后。 如：I want to watch TV. Please turn on the T V .也可以讲：Please turn the TV on

145、. 误 He drove quickly his new car. 正 He drove his new car quickly. 析副词在句中的位置很活， 但主要有以下几种用法： 实意动词之前， 如：He quickly give me the answer.在 be 动词之后，如：The little boy is often latefor class.第一助动词之后，如：This book has almost been finished.在单独使用的b e动词和助动词之前，如：Can you help me this afternoon? Icertainly c a n .但是无论

146、如何也不能将副词置于动词羽宾语之间， 如果是宾语从句或是很长的名词词组作宾语则才可以这样用：He heard clearly what the teacher said. 误 The children came late yesterday to the cinema. 正 The children came late to the cinema yesterday. 析 表示一定长度的时间的副词不应放于句中， 可放于句尾。 如果表示强调则可放于句首。 误 You have few new books, havent you? 正 you have few new books, have yo

147、u? 析 英语中的数量形容词有两组。 修饰可数名词的有few（ 很少，几乎没有） ,a few（ 有一些，几个） ；修饰不可数名词的有little （ 很少，几乎没有） ，a little（ 有一点，有一些） 。要注意的是当few和little用于句中时应看作否定句，而a few和alittle用于句中时则应看作是肯定句。 误 He spent quite little money on his food. 正 He spent quite a little money on his food. 析quite a为一固定用法， 其意为“ 十分， 相当， 所以“ 。quite a few = m

148、any,quite a little= much 而 only a little= little, only a few=few. 误 Do you want to have many bread? 正 Do you want to have some bread? 析some与any都可以用作形容词、副词或代词，在一般情况下，some用于肯定句，any用于疑问句和否定句，但在希望得到肯定答复时，应用some。其次是som e可以用来修饰可数名词和不可数名词。 误 Please tell me where the shoes shop is? 正 Please tell me where th

149、e shoe shop is. 析在用名词作修饰词来修饰另一名词时， 这个作修饰词的名词应用单数形式，如：a shoe shop 鞋店a fruit shop 水果店a book shop 书店a post office 邮局a police station 警察局a bus stop 汽车站 误 He is weak at physics. 正 He is weak in physics. 析 在表达擅长于作某事时用be good at something,而其反意词为be bad atsomething, 但 be weak in something0 误 This dictionary

150、is worth to buy. 正 This dictionary is worth buying. 析 be worth后可接动、名词表达值得作某事，又可接价格、金钱表示值多少钱。 误 D ont afraid of that. 正 D ont be afraid of that. 析 afraid在英文中是形容词而不是动词。这样的词组还有：be afraid of 害怕 be careful of 小心be certain o f 有把握，确 定 be sure o f 确信be glad of 高兴 be sick of 厌恶be fond of 喜欢 误 The work has a

151、lready been done well. 正 The work has already been well done. 析 w ell与badly作副词时，表示好坏，如果句子是被动语态，则应放在过去分词之前，如：This machine has been badly damaged.如果句子是主动语态，则应放于句末，如：I did my homework well. 误 We are yet in the classroom now. 正 We are already in the classroom now. 析 already主要用于肯定句，而 yet多用于否定句和疑问句中，如：D i

152、d you finish it? No. not yet. 误 Look. Here comes he! 正 Look! Here he comes! 误 Look! Here the bus comes! 正 Look! Here comes the bus! 析 在句子开头用Here时，如主语是人称代词则不要用倒装语序，如果主语是名词则要用倒装语序。 误 She is my older sister. 正 She is my elder sister. 析elder和eldest是用来指家庭中兄弟姐妹的长幼关系， 而older, oldest则是指岁数大多少，如：She is three

153、years older than I. 误 Im tired. I cant go further. 正 Im tired. I cant go farther. 析far有两个比较级farther较远的， further进一步的， 如： D o you need anyfurther explanation?你需要进一步的解释吗？ 当然它也有两个最高级。 farthest和furthest. 误 I went to Beijing University five years before. 正 I went to Beijing University five years ago. 析 ag

154、o常与过a 时连用，而 before则多与完成时连用。 误 - Have you finished your homework?- No, not already. 正 - Have you finished your homework?- No, not yet. 析 仍然有三个英文字可以表达它们是already, y et与 still。 要注意的是already经常用于肯定句中，如The bus has already gone。 而 y e t多用于疑问句和否定句中，如： Have you finished your homework yet?而 still则常用于主语与谓语动词之间，

155、 如： We still can*t decide what to d o .但也有时用于b e 动词之后，如：He is still here. 误 He is very higher than I am. 正 He is much higher than I am. 析much可以用来修饰比较级， 而 very则用来修饰形容词原级， 如： Fm verytired. 误 - Can I walk to the station? - Youd better not. It is very far. 正 - Can I walk to the station?- Youd better not

156、, It is a long way. 析for 一般用在疑问句与否定句中， 如： How far is it from here to the station?又如：It isnt far. 误 Ive ever been to America. 正 Fve been to America once. 析 once多用于肯定句，而ever则用于疑问句，否定句，及条件状语从句中，如：Have you ever been to London?- No, I am not afraid so.- No, Tm afraid not. 析在肯定的答语中我们可以用so来代替上句所讲的事件， 如： D

157、o you thinkshe is a good student? Yes I think so, /I hope so, /I believe so/ Fm afraid so.但在否定的答语中，英语口语的习惯用法则有所不同，如，I don* think s o 而在hope,belive 与 afraid 后则常用 not, 如：I hope not. 误 She didnt work enough hard, so she couldnt pass the exam. 正 She didnt work hard enough, so she couldnt pass the exam.

158、析enough 可以作名词用， 如： Enough has been said for how to learn Englishwell.( 对于如何学好英语已经讲的足够多了。) 另外它可以作为形容词，如：Ihave enough money (or money enough) to buy this dictionary. 注意 enough 作为形容词时即可放于名词前又可放于名词后， 在初中范围的考题中多用于名词之前。如果enough作为副词用，那么它一定要放在被修饰的形容词或副词之后。 误 You cant be very careful. 正 You can*t be too care

159、ful. 析 此句话的含意是你如何小心也不过分。t。 。 t。的用法是” 太以至于不能作某事” 。 但在实际应用时也常常将后面的to省去， 如 1： It is too expensive forme.那对我来讲是太贵了。 误 He is good past fifty. 正 He is well past fifty. 析 w ell作为副词用时除用于“ 好“ 之外还有“ 大大地、远远地” ，等意。往往有人对下面两句的对或错有争议；He is well.He is good.其实这两句都是正确的表达法， 只不过其含意不同。 Heis well是“ 他身体不错” ，而 He is good则为

160、 他是个好人” 。 误 She is not as half clever as her brother. 正 She is not half as clever as her brother. 析 在 asa s 结构中要将修饰形容词的数量词倍数及nearly, almost,exactly-等置 于第一 个as之前。 误 He is same age as Tom. 正 He is the same age as Tom. 析 the sameas是固定的用法，其中定冠词the是不可省也不能换成别的词的。 误 Mother and her daughter are exactly like

161、. 正 Mother and her daughter are exactly alike.* like作为介词，其意为“ 像“ ，应用于look like, be like, sound like,其后要加宾语。而 alike 是形容词，或副词，0: You and I think alike. The twins aredressed alikeo但 alike仅作表语而不能用于名词前作定语。 误 Who is taller of the two? 正 Who is the taller of the two? 析 两者的比较级之前要加定冠词。 误 I have less books th

162、an Tom. 正 I have fewer books than Tom. 析 less是 little的比较级，而 fewer是 few的比较级。less后应加不可数名词而fewer后是可数名词。 误 There are three girls in my group. The cleverer is Mary. 正 There are three girls in my group. The cleverest is Mary. 析 在两者之间应用比较级，在三者之间或三者以上的范围内应用最高级。 误 The boy sat there as quiet as his sister. 正

163、The boy sat there as quietly as his sister. 析 asas的用法要注意的是： 在其中间应加形容词或副词的原级， 而不可加比较级，也有的语法书中称为同级比较。要根据句意决定是加形容词还是副词， 这要看它具体是修饰动词还是名词而定， 如： He is as good as his friend. 误 The harder you study, and you can learn more. 正 The harder you study, the more you can learn. 析 英文中如果要表达越来越怎样，在初中范围有两种表达法：比较级+and+

164、比较级。定冠词+ 比较级. . .,如：The nights are getting longer andlongero要注意的是多音节形容词的比较级前要加m ore,这样的用法是： moreand more 力口形容词， 如：The girl is growing more and more beautiful. 误 Studying physics is not so interesting as to learn English. 正 Studying physics is not so interesting as learning English. 析 在作比较时，英语一般要求对比的

165、两部分结构应一致。如用动名词，应都用动名词，用不定式时则都用不定式。 但有时在后一个不定式前的符号t。 可以省略。 如： To repair the old one is as much expensive as (to) buy a new one. 误 The girl is more cleverer than the boy. 正 The girl is much more clever (much cleverer) than the boy. 析 clever有两个比较级：cleverer和 more clever,要注意的是不能用比较级来修饰比较级。clever的两个比较级也各有

166、不同之处，如用在两种不同性质的比较时多用more clever,如：He is more clever than honest.( 他的聪明要远远超过其诚实。) 析 The boy is the tallest to the three. 正 The boy is the tallest of the three. 析 最高级的范围要用of加复数形式或加集合名词。 误 This book is one of the most useful dictionary. 正 This book is one of the most useful dictionaries. 析 在 。 ne o f 后

167、面最高级形容词后要加可数名词复数。 误 This dictionary is the much best one of the English Chinese dictionaries. 正 This dictionary is much the best one of the English Chinese dictionaries. 析 在修饰最高级时应用far/by far/much力 口 the加最高级。但 very例外，如： He is the very best player in the team. 误 Shanghai is bigger than any other citi

168、es in China. 正 Shanghai is bigger than any other city in China. 析 在比较级中表示比较对象时如用any other其后一般要加单数名词。 误 Most of stories in this book are written in English. 正 Most of the stories in this book are written in English. 正 Most stories in this book are written in English. 析 ” 大多数” 一词的表达法有most of the + 名词，

169、或 most+名词。当用前一种结构时，其后面的定冠词不可少。 误 The temperature of that room is higher than this room. 正 The temperature of that room is higher than that of this room. 析 比较级用于两句话之间时，比较的部分不可省略掉，但为了避免重复，一般都要用that代替前面的单数名词，而用those代替前面的复数名词，如：The books in that box are bigger than those in this boxo 误 He is no more her

170、e. Maybe he is at home. 正 He is no longer here. Maybe he is at home. 析 no more在现代英语中多译为：” 从此再也不会了 , 如：His voice is nomore here.他已经去世了， 他的声音不可能再出现了。 而用no longer表达目前的状态。 要注意下面几组句子的实际含意： This room is no cleaner than that one.即两间屋子都不干净。 （ 两者都不干净） This room is not cleaner than that one,即这屋子不如那间干净。（ 前者不如后

171、者干净。即一间干净，一间不干净。）（ 三）例题解析1 I think Chinese is than maths.A. interesting B more interestingC. most interesting D . the most interesting 答案 B, 析 在有than作比较的句子中应用形容词的比较级。2 - What does Lucy like better, singing or dancing?- Singing, of course. Shes known to it.A. be good at B. be good forC. be bad at D .

172、 be bad for 答案A. 加 be good at为固定搭配，意为” 擅长作某事” 。初中英语中有些这样的固定用法应记牢， 而不能似是而非。 如：be good at, be bad at, be poor in, be weekin, be fit for3 The Huang He River is one of in China.A. The long river B. the longest riverC. the longest rivers D . the longer river 答案 C, 析 在 。 ne of + 定冠词+ 最高级之后的名词应用复数形式。4 The

173、girl was afraid she threw her bag away.A. so, that B. too, to C. too, that D . enough, to 答案A. 京 sothat为 如此怎样以至于如何 ，此句意思是：小女孩如此害怕以至于扔下包跑掉了。而 to o -to 的意思为 如何如何，以至于不能作某事 。但 to的后面是动词原形，而不是从句。5 It was yesterday than today.A. hot B. hoterC. hotter D . the hottest 答案 C. 析 用 than表达比较的句中应用比较级。6 Which subje

174、ct do you like , English Chinese or maths?A. best B. wellC. better D . good 答案 A. 析 在两者之间应用比较级，而在三者之间或三者以上用最高级。7 None of the students watched it .A. careful enough B. enough carefullyC. carefully enough D . enough careful 答案Q 京首先应判定是选用用来修饰名词的形容词还是用来修饰动词的副词。 这里是修饰watch这一动词， 应选用副词。当enough用来修饰副词或形容词时应放

175、于被修饰的形容词或副词之后。8 she eats, shell be.A. Moree fat B. The moreefatterC. More-,the fatter D . The more,-,the fatter 答案 D . 析 the+比较级表示“ 越来越” 本句应译为：她吃得越多，她就会越胖。9 I dont think English is Chinese.A. as important as B. not important asC. not so important D . important as 答案 A. 析 think+宾语从句时，应采用否定主句的形式，如：中文讲

176、， 我认为你不对 ，英文应为： 我不认为你对 。 I dont think you are right.所以不能选答案 B。而C、D均为不正确的表达法。10 Miss Gao is a good English teacher. The students in her classEnglish. A. are interested in B. are interesting inC. are interested at D . are interesting to 答案 A. 析 过去分词常用来修饰人，而现在分词常用来修饰物，如：an interestingb o o k ,实际上过去分词含有

177、被动之意， 如： interested其含意是 被. . .所吸弓I，感动 。而 interesting则为 使人感兴趣的 ，如：an interesting man 一个有趣、风趣的人。A. alone B. lonelyC. happily D . friendly 答案 B. 析alone意为 独自的， 一个人的” ， 它只能作表语不能作定语。 I am not alonein doing such a thing. 而 lonely 意为 寂寞的， 孤单的 ， 如： The old man felt lonely.要体会两个词的区别，如：The old man lived alone,

178、 but he didnt feel lonely.12 What a cough! You seem ill.A. terrible, terribly B. terribly, terribleC. terrible, terrible D . terribly, terribly 答案 A, 析 terrible是形容词，而 terribly是副词，第一个空是修饰名词的，所以应填入形容词。第二个空ill是形容词，这里terribly是用来修饰ill的。13 The two friends were pleased to see each other that they forgoteve

179、rything. A. so B. tooC. very D . much 答案A.僚 这里用的是sothat的固定搭配。14 Which is , Li Leis box or Han Meimeis box?A. heavy B. heavierC. more heavier D . the heaviest 答案 B. 析 两者之间用比较级，三者或以上用最高级。15 You don*t like the same colours and I don*t like them, .A. too B. alsoC. either D . neither 答案 C. 析 在否定句中也应用eith

180、er,而不要用to o ,因to。用于肯定句中。16 Jim is at all his lessons. And Tm sure hell do very in theexams.A. well, good B. good, wellC. well, well D . good, good 答案 B. 析 good为形容词，如：He is good.他是个好人。而 well作为身体状况的好坏讲时是形容词，如：He is well为他身体不错，而作为其他意思时为副词，如： He speaks English well.17 You look than before, why?A. more t

181、hin B. more thinnerC. much more thin D . much thinner 答案 D . 析 多音节形容词才用more或 most加形容词来表示其比较级或最高级， 而thin的比较级为thinnero18 Lets go out fbr supper now. Pm very .A. hungry B. angryC. tired D . thirsty 答案 A. 析 hungry-饿，angry-生气，tired-紧, 疲劳，thirsty-口渴。要注意名词的词义。19 - Can you understand me?- Sorry, I can under

182、stand you.A. hardly B. almostC.even D .ever 答案 A. 析 hardly为一否定词，用在句中时应被看作是否定句。在答语中Sorry决定了其意为“ 听不明白 ，所以只能选hardlyo20 do you write to your penfriend?*About twice a month.1A. How often B. How soonC. How much D . How long 答案A.m how often用来提问某一动作经多久就要发生一次，也就是提问发生的频率。how soon是问从现在起还有多久。21 Changjiang River

183、 is river in ChinaA. long B. longerC. longest D . the longest 答案 D .22 Fil work I can.A. so hardly as B. so hard asC. as hardly as D . as hard as 答案 D . 析 hard可用作形容词和副词，如：The desk was made of hard wood 又如：It is raining hardo 而 hardly是副词，其词义是“ 几乎不 ，如：Hardly did Isleep last night.我昨晚几乎没有睡觉。 而且hardly用于

184、句首时要采用倒装语序。a s-a s即可以用于肯定句， 也可以用于否定句， 但 so -a s则只能用于否定句中。23 It is very to listen to him.A. interested B. interestingC. interested in D . interest 答案 B. 析 interest作为名词有两个词义，兴趣，银行中所讲的利息。而其形容 词 interesting是 使人感兴趣的 ， 而interested是“ 感兴趣的 如： He is interestedin English.24 Things are worse than I thought.A.

185、more B. fewC. very D . much 答橐 D , 析 只有much可以修饰比较级。25 It is one oclock, but her father hasnt come back .A. already B. stillC. too D . yet 答案 D . 析 完成时的否定句尾要用y e t , 而 already则用于肯定句。26 Comrade Chen is older than I.A. very B. moreC. much D . quite 答案 C. 析 只有much可, 以修饰比较级。 可以修饰比较级的词还有much, far, even al

186、ittle, by far 等。27 She did her homework .A. carefully B. carefulC. care D . careless 答案 A. 析 这里应填入副词，而 careless是由care加 less后辍得来的，less意为”没有” ，是否定之意，如：careless-不小心，homeless-无家可归。而 carefully为副词。28 They cant answer the question in Japanese; we cant answer it, .A. also B. tooC. either D . neither 答案 C.29

187、 - How are your parents?-They are very , thank you.A. good B. kindC. well D . happy 答案 c. 析 由问句得知其询问的是身体如何，所以well作为身体状况不错时应视为形容词。 30 Peter runs in our class.A. the fast B. fasterC. fastest D . most fast 答案 C. 析 副词的最高级前可以加定冠词，也可以不加定冠词。31 We were all glad that we sang and danced.A.such B.soC. very D .

188、 quite 答案 B. 析 在 so与 that之间只有形容词时不可用sucho32 Kate sings Joan.A. as well as B. as good asC. so good as D . as better as 答案A.苏 这里well为副词，意为“ 唱得好” 。33 This egg smells , though it looks all right.A. good B. wellC. bad D badly 答案 C. 析 smell为系动词， 其后应加形容词， 而不是副词。同样的词， 还有sound,feel, seem become（ 变成） 等等， 如：Ic

189、e feels cold in winter.34 Wait a minute, I have to tell you.A. something interested B. something interestingC. interesting something D . anything interesting 答案 gm 修饰不定代词的修饰词要放在不定代词之后。35 I shall visit you next year. 答案 B.36 My sister said she would try to speak English every day.A. a little B. a few

190、C. litttle D . few 答案 A. 析 little修饰不可数名词, 而a little意为” 一些，一点” 。37 I have friends here and I often visit them.A. few B. littleC. a few D . a little 答案 c. 加 a few意为” 有些“ ，few后面要加可数名词复数。38 Of all these books, do you think, which one is ?A. interesting B. much interestingC. more interesting D . the most

191、 interesting 答案 D . 析 Of all these books是用来表示最高级的范围五、 连 词（ -）知识概要连词是一种在句子与句子之间，短语之间以及名词等其他词语之间起连接作用的虚词，它不能单独作句子的成份。按其意义可分为并列连词和从属连词两大类。 并列连词连接的双方是对等的。常有的并列连词有and, both-and,either-or, neithernor, not only,but also, as well as 等。 但如果连接的两部分意义不趋向一致，意义有转折的并列连词有：but, however, while （ 而） ，only （ 只不过） 。还有表示

192、选择关系的并列连词，如：or, or else, otherwise 再有的是连接双方，互为因果，或表示前因后果的连词有：for, so, therefore （ 因此） ，then等。 从属连词在初中范围内常常用来连接名词性从句， 如： that, if, whether,其次用来连接状语从句。其中有原因状语从句，常用的连接词有：when while, as,since, before, after, once, as soon as, until, till 连接条件状语的连词有：if, unless,as long a s 等，而原因状语的连接词有because, since, as,

193、now that （ 既然） 。目的、结果、 方式、 比较、 地点等状语从句的连接词有： so that, so, that, such-that, asas, than, where, , 它们在句子与文章中几乎无处不见。 具体用法见下表。连词用法一览表种类功用例句并列连词 连接具有并列关系的 词 He knows neither English nor French.短语 Are you going by bus or on foot?分句 Mary was a good girl, but she had one shortcoming.从属连词 引导： 状 语 从 句 TH do it

194、 as you told me.You will be late unless you hurry.连接代词和连接副词 主语从句 What he said proved true.When we*ll start has not been decided yet.表语从句 This is why he didnt come yesterday.That is where he lives.宾语从句 The man asked me which I liked best.I can*t understand why she is so late.关系代词和关系副词 定语从句 Nicotine i

195、s a drug that gets one into the habitof smoking.He came last night when I was out.（ -）正误辨析 误 Both my parents are not here. They went to the concert just now. 正 Neither of my parents is here. They went to the concert just now. 析 在英语中both一般用于肯定句中，如用于否定句中，其意义也不同于汉语，如：Both of us are not right.在英语中应被理解为“

196、 我们俩不都对。” 而Neither of us is rig h to才能被理解为“ 我们俩无一正确” 。 误 He or his parents has some tickets for the film. 正 He or his parents have some tickets for the film. 析 由 。r连接两主语时，谓语动词应与相临近的那一个主语保持一致。 误 You should study hard, and you wont pass the exam. 正 You should study hard, or you won*t pass the exam. 析o

197、r作为连词，这里的意思为“ 否 则 又 如 ：Hurry up, or youll be late forschool. 误 Though he is poor, but he is ready to help others. 正 Though he is poor, he is ready to help others. 正 He is poor, but he is ready to help others. 析 ” 虽然但是” 是中文中的常用结构，但在英文中用了“ 虽然” 则不要用“ 但是“ ，用了“ 但是 则不能再用“ 虽然“ ，二者只可用其一。 误 Either you or I a

198、re on duty. 正 Either you or I am on duty. 析either-or连接两个主语时，其谓语动词与相临近的一个主语相呼应，这也叫作就近原则。类似的用法还有or, neither nor, not onlybut also等。 误 Tom is our English teacher and teaching English in our school now. 正 Tom is our English teacher and is teaching English in our school now. 析 并列句中常常在后面的句子中作一些省略，以免重复， 但不

199、是所有词都可作任意的省略的。当你连接的是两个系动词时， 后面的那个系动词不可省略，也就是讲连接的部分不可省略。 误 My father likes swimming and to collect stamps. 正 My father likes swimming and collecting stamps. 析 由并列连词连接的两个部分要保持相等的语法结构。 如是动名词则都用动名词，如用不定式则都应用不定式，这是初学者要注意的一点。 误 My father is reading a newspaper, I am doing my homework. 正 My father is readi

200、ng a newspaper while I am doing my homework. 析 两个并列句中间不可用逗号连接，要用并列连词来连接。 误 My father asked me that if I wanted to learn how to drive. 正 My father asked me if I wanted to learn how to drive. 析 宾语从句的连接词只能有一个不能重复使用。 误 We will go both to Beijing and Shanghai. 正 We will go to both Beijing and Shanghai. 析

201、 用bothand作连接词时，其相连接的部分结构也要相同。 误 Not only Mary but also her brothers is going to dance. 正 Not only Mary but also her brothers are going to dance. 析 由not only- but also连接两个主语时，其重点在其后面的那一个主语，所以谓语形式应采用就近原则。 误 The teacher as well as his students are coming. 正 The teacher as well as his students is coming

202、. 析 由as well a s 连接两个主语时， 谓语动词与as well a s 后面的名词无关，而与前面的名词相一致。 误 Tom does not swim nor play football. 正 Tom does not swim or play football. 析 nor主要用于连接句子的对等连词，如在否定句中连接某一部分时要用o r,但要注意句子的含意，如：This animal does not like a cow or a horse.这个动物既不像牛也不像马。This animal does not like a cow but a horse.这个动物不像牛而像马

203、。 误 For there is no light in the classroom. The students must have gone home. 正 The students must have gone home, for there is no light in the classroom. 析 由 fo r引出的原因状语从句在使用时要注意不能将该从句置于句 首，而应置于主句之后，并在主句与从句之间加一逗号。更要注意的是because, as,since与for 4 个表示原因的连词中because是因果关系，是最强的一个，而 for是最弱的一个。有些语法书中干脆把for叫做并列

204、连词 误 My brother will pass the English exam is no question. 正 That my brother will pass the English exam is no question. 析 主语从句的引导词that是不可省略的。 这一点不要和宾语从句的引导词相提并论。 误 This map will show you how will you get to the hotel. 正 This map will show you how you will get to the hotel. 析 名词性从句作宾语从句使用时， 最重要的一点是要用

205、陈述语句。 特别要注意的是那些使用双宾语的动词，如：tell, ask, show 误 While the clock struch ten, all the lights went out. 正 When the clock struck ten, all the lights went out. 析while是强调两个动作在同时进行中， 如： While I am doing myhomework,my father is reading a newspaper.而这里的when是 正当某某时刻“ ，” 就在这一时间点上” ，其重点强调在某一特定时刻某动作的发生。 误 While I wa

206、s walking along the street yesterday, I met an old friend. 正 When I was walking along the street yesterday, I met an old friend. 析 这里用when表达在一个动作的进行中，另一个动作突然发生了。正在进行的动作用一进行时态，而突然发生的动作用一般时态。 误 While I heard the bad news I felt sad. 正 When I heard the bad news, I felt sad. 析 while不能表达一点儿的时间，即瞬时某一时间点。

207、误 After school some students play football, or others go to the library. 正 After school some students play football, while others go to the library. 析 while在此处意为” 而，然而， 误 She sang when she walked along the dark street. 正 She sang as she walked along the dark street. 析 as用于句中时，其要点是强调两个动作的同时进行。这里用when

208、虽然不能讲是语法上的错误，但则看不出来小女孩因独自走黑暗的街道因害怕而唱歌的心情。 误 I finished my homework until twelve oclock last night. 正 I didnt finished my homework until twelve o*clock last night. 正 I did my homework until twelve oclock last night. 析 until用在句中时其含义是某一动作一直持续到某时结束，那么句中的动词则一定要用持续性动词，如果要用瞬间，或截止性动词时一定要用否定句式。因截止性动作的否定式应看作是

209、持续性的动作。如离开leave是瞬间动作，因一出门即为离开了，而不离开则是长时间的。 误 I have studied English when I was twelve. 正 I have studied English since I was twelve. 析 since引出的时间状语从句是表达了一个时间点，而这个时间点是主句动作的启始点，所以主句一般要用完成时态。 误 Because he didnt study hard, so he didnt pass the exam. 正 He didnt pass the exam because he didnt study hard.

210、析 because与 so在英文中两者不能并用的，只能在句中用其一。 误 He was such excited that he could not speak. 正 He was so excited that he could not speak. 析 so与 such的用法可以分为四种情况，用于单数可数名词之前，其格式是such+不定冠词+ 形容词+ 单数可数名词，如：It is such a beautiful book thatevery child likes it.也可以用so ,其格式是so+形容词+ 不定冠词+ 单数可数名词， 如： It was so beautiful a

211、 book that every child likes it.在不可数名词前或可数名词复数前这时只能用 such,如 I： It is such good weather that we want to swim.又如： They are such good students that they can pass the exam easily.在 few,little, much, many这4 个字前只能用so而不能用such,如：I have so muchmoney that I can buy everything I want.当that前只有形容词或副词时， 这时只能用 so

212、,如： She is so beautiful that every one likes her. He ran so fast that I couldntkeep up with him. 误 He got up earlier this morning so as to that he could catch the first bus. 正 He got up earlier this morning so as to catch the first bus. 正 He got up so earlier that he could catch the first bus. 析so-t

213、hat与so that的用法有相同之处， 那就是其后接从句， 而 so as to 其后要接不定式，即动词原形。这样的词组还有：in order to。 误 I want to buy same stamp that you have. 正 I want to buy the same stamp as you have. 析 the same-as (that)这是个固定用法，在 same前的定冠词是不能少的。而 the same,that意为 我要的就是那一个 。而 the sameas为” 要的是和. . .一样的东西” 。 误 Before I do not give you the

214、answer, Til ask you some questions. 正 Before I give you the answer, 1 * 1 1 ask you some questions. 析 这种错误是由于受中文的影响。在中文中可以讲” 我没给你答案前” 。而英文用了 before就不要再用否定句了。（ 三）例题解析1 We bought Granny a present, she didnt like it.A. but B. andC. or D . so 答案 A. 析 由于句意的原因，应选择转折连词。2 Run quickly, we*ll miss the early t

215、rain.A.and B. butC.so D . or 答案 D . 析 or这里应译为：否则。3 Hl give the book to him he comes back.A. since B. as soon asC. before D . until 答案 B. 析 as soon a s 引出的时间状语从句应用一般现在时表示将来要发生的动作。4 D ont cross the road the light turns green.A. when B. whileC. until D . as 答案 c. 析 until应译为 直到才 ，因为前面的祈使句为否定句。又如：She did

216、not go to bed until her mother came back.应译为 直到她妈妈回来她才睡觉 。5 Miss Gao has been a t e a c h e r 1990.A. before B. afterC. since D . in 答案 c. 析 因为主句为完成时，所以应用since表示该动作的启始点。6 - Which would you like better, tea milk?- Tea, please.A. but B. andC. or D . with 答案 c. 析 在疑问句与否定句中应用or来表示一种选择。7 We love spring t

217、heres beautiful flowers every where.A. though B. butC. or D . because 答案D. 析 因为这里表示的是因果关系。8 Please leave 7 ： 0 0 , then youll be able to get there earlier.A. till, in B. from, /C. before, / D . behind, to 答案 C. 析 before为在7 ： 0 0 之前离开。9 The teacher didnt begin the lesson all the students stopped talk

218、ing.A. until B. afterC. ifD . because 答案A. 加 这句应译为” 直到所有的学生都停止讲话老师才开始上课” 。因begin为瞬间动词，所以应用否定句。10 Betty didnt go to see the film yesterday she was ill.A. but B. untilC. if D . because 答案 D . 析 这里是表示因果关系， 所以应用because。因为她病了所以未去看电影。11 You must start right now, youll miss the train.A. for B. andC. so D .

219、 or 答案D. 析 or译为“ 否则” 。本句句意为：你必须马上走了，否则要赶不上火车了。12 he is a child of six, he can read and write.A. Whose B. IfC. Though D . Because 答案Q 析 这种状语从句在英语中称为让步状语从句，应译为：虽然他才是个6岁的孩子，他却可以读书和写字。13 I like fish, chicken, eggs.A. and, and B. and, withC. /, and D . and, / 答案 c. 箱 在有若干个名词或动词出现时， 每一个词之间只用逗号连接，只在最后两个词之间

220、加 ando 如： The old man passed the street, went into a shop and boughtsome foodo14 Take this dictionary with you you may use it in class.A. when B. in order toC. but D . so that 答案D. 加 so that应译为“ 为的是二本句句义为：带上字典，为的是在上课时可能有用。而 in order to 其后应接动词不定式，如：Take this dictionary with you inorder to use it in c

221、lass o15 I hope will be fine tomorrow.A. it B. whatC. whether D . when 答案 A. 析 hope后接的是宾语从句，而且宾语从句中少主语，应用it来代替天气。16 she was not well, I decided to go without her.A. Though B. AsC. When D . Because of 答案 B. 析 as这里应译为 由于二全句意为：由于她不舒服，我决定不带她去了。而 because o f 其后不能接从句只能接宾语。如： Because of the heavy rain, wed

222、ecided not to go。A. suchon B. such“nC. tooin D soon 答案 D . 析 因 many前只能用s o 来修饰，所以只能选择D 选项。而 spend-onsomething 为在某事上花费时间或钱。 如： She spent a lot of money on her clothes o18 Mother was cooking she a knock at the door.A. when, listen to B. while, listened toC. while, heard D . when, heard 答案D. 析 when在这里应

223、译为：就在那时，那一刻，那一瞬间。19 Speak slowly, we can understand you.A.and B. orC. if D . because 答案A. 加 and这里是并列连词，应译为：请讲慢些这样我们就会明白你的意思。20 Youll learn English well you put your heart into it.A. if B. soC. until D . or 答案A. 东 本句译为：如果你将心放在学习上，你就会将英语学好。这里的语法现象是从句中用一般现在时表示将来。21 I wont let you in you show me your pa

224、ss.A. until B. forC. since D . because 答案A.22 She didn*t go to school she was ill.A. why B. becauseC. where D . but 答案B.六、 介 词(-)知识概要介词在英语中用法很活，也无一定规律可循。在初中范围内还应学一个记住一个，特别是那些和动词的特殊搭配。这样长期下去不断学习自然会总结出一套自己的规律来。下面是一般的规律，可帮助学习时参考，千万不要作为定律去背诵，照搬。介 词 表 示 时 间 表 示 地 点 方 位 表 示 原 因 方 式 其 他about大约在. . . . 时间 a

225、bout five oclock在周围，大约多远 about fivekilometres 关于、涉及talk about youabove 高出某一平面above sea levelacross 横过 walk across the street 对面 across the streetafter在. . .之后after supper跟后面one after another追赶run after youagainst 背靠逆风against the wall, against the wind反对be against youamong 三者以上的中间among the treesa t在某

226、时刻at ten在小地点at the school gate表示速度at high speed向着，对着at mebefore 在. . .之前before lunch位于之前sit before mebehind 位于. . .之后behind the treebelow 低于. . .水平below zero不合格below the standardb y 到时刻，在时刻之前by five oclock紧挨着site by site乘坐交通工具 by air, by bick被由was made by usduring 在. . .期间 during the holidaysfo r延续多

227、长时间for five years向去leave for Shanghai 为了，对于be good for youfrom 从某时到. . . 某时 from morning till night 来自何方from New York由某原料制成be made from来自何处where are you fromin 在年、月、周 较 长 时 间 内 in a week在里面in the room用 某 种 语 言 in English穿着in redinto 进入. . .里面walk into除分divide into变动turn into waternear 接近某时 near five

228、 years 在. . .附近 near the parkof 用某种原料制成be made of属于. . . . 性质a map of U. S .Ao n 某日、某日的上下午on Sunday afternoon在. . .上面on the desk 靠吃. . .为生 live on rice 关于 a book on Physicsover渡过一整段时间 work over night在上方over the desk超过， 高于 over five pairspast超过某一时刻ten past five经过某地walk past the parksince从某时以来since 19

229、80原因Since you were illthrough经过某一时期 through his life 通过、穿过某地through the foresttill until 直到某时为止 till five oclockto 差多少时间five to ten问，到, 去往to Shanghai面对面face to face给予 give a book to meunder 在. . .下面under the desk少于under ten在. . .管制之 下 under the rulewith 用某种工具 with a pen带着，具有with mewithout 没有without

230、air（ 二）正误辨析 误 We got to the top of the mountain in daybreak. 正 We got to the top of the mountain at day break. 析 at 用于具体时刻之前，如： sunrise, midday, noon, sunset, midnight, nighto 析in 要用于较长的一段时间之内， 如： in the morning / afternoon,或 in theweek / month / year. 或 in spring / supper /autumn / winter 等等。 误 We

231、visited the old man in Sunday afternoon. 正 We visited the old man on Sunday afternoon. 析 in the morning, in the afternoon如果在这两个短语中加入任何修饰词其前面的介词都要改为 o n ,如：on a cold morning, on the morning of July 14th 误 He became a writter at his twenties 正 He became a writter in his twenties 析 这句话应译为：他在20多岁时就成了作家。

232、在某人的一段生活时间段中要用介词in来表示，而在具体岁数时用at来表示。 误 He went to New York to find a job in sixteen years old. 正 He went to New York to find a job at sixteen. 析 在具体年岁前用a t,如：at the age of 12, at your a g e ,等等。 误 We went to swim in the river in a very hot day. 正 We went to swim in the river on a very hot day. 析 具体某

233、一天要用介词o n ,又如：on New Yeafs D ay 误 Pm looking forward to seeing you on Christmas. 正 Im looking for ward to seeing you at Christmas. 析 在节日的当天用。 n , 而全部节日期间用at,Christmas是圣诞节期间，一般要有两周或更长的时间。 误 I havent see you during the summer holidays. 正 I havent seen you since the beginning of the summer holidays. 误

234、At entering the classroom, I heard the good news. 正 On entering the classroom, I heard the good news. 析 O n多动名词表示 一就” 。本句的译文应是：我一进入教室就听多这个好消息了。又如：on hearing 一听见， on arrival 一到达就. . .(on表示动作的名词) 误 In the beginning of the book, there are some interesting stories. 正 At the beginning of the book, there

235、are some interesting stories. 析 at the begining与 at the end都是指某事物的开始与结束部分，均不指时间范围， 而 in the beginning则是指开始一段时间。 in the end = at last是指 最终，终于” 之意。 误 Till the end of next week. I will have finished this work. 正 By the end of next week. I will have finished this work. 析 b y 引起的时间状语表示了动作的截止点， 其意思为 不迟于某一

236、时刻将工作做完” ， 所以主句一般是完成时态。 当然可以有将来时态，Hl be there byfive o七 lock.而 till则表达其一动作一直持续到某一时刻， 但句中的动词一定要用持续性动词，而瞬间的截止性动词应用其否定句式，如：I wont finish this worktill(until) next weekend. 误 He came to London before last weekend. 正 He had come to London before last weekend. 正 He came to London two weeks ago. 析 before 一

237、般要与完成时连用，而 ago则与一般过去时连用。 误 I have studied English for three years gince I had come here. 正 I have studied English for three years since I came here. 析 since用来表达主句动作的开始时间，所以其引出的从句中应为过去时，而不能用完成时态 误 I can help you repair this bike. You will get it after two hours. 正 I can help you repair this bike. You

238、 will get it in two hours. 析 中文经常讲两小时之后来取， 两天内会修好， 而这个介词在英文中要用in而不要用aftero其原因有二， after多用于过去时， 如： I arrived in New York.After three days, I found a job in the bank. after 加时间是表达一个不确定的时间范围，如：after three days,即三天之后的哪一天都可以。所以在许诺若干时间内会完成某事时，一定要用介词in。 误 Three days after he died. 正 After three days he died

239、. 正 Three days later he died. 析 after与 later都可以用来表达一段时间之后，但它们所处的位置不同，after在时间词前，而 later在时间词后。 误 She hid herself after the tree. 正 She hid herself behind the tree. 析 after多用来表达某动作之后，所以有的语法书中称它为动态介词，如：I run after him. After finishing my homework, I went to see a film. 而 behind 贝多用于静态事物之后。 误 There is a

240、 beautiful bird on the tree. 正 There is a beautiful bird in the tree. 析树上长出的果实， 树叶要用。 n ,而其他外来的人、 物体均要用in the tree. 误 Shanghai is on the east of China. 正 Shanghai is in the east of China. 析 在表达地理位置时有3 个介词：in, on, too in表示在某范围之内； on表示与某地区接壤；to 则表示不相接。如：Japan is to the east of China. 误 I arrived at Ne

241、w York on July 2nd. 正 I arrived in New York on July 2nd. 析at用来表达较小的地方， 而in用来表达较大的地方。 at常用于at the schoolgate, at home, at a bus stop, at the station, at the cinema, at a small villageo 误 He lived in No. 3 Beijing Road. 正 He lived at No. 3 Beijing Road. 析在门牌号码前要用a t,并要注意它的惯用法： at the end of the street

242、, at thefoot of the mountain, at the top of the page。 误 There is a colour TV set at the corner of the hall. 正 There is a colour TV set in the comer of the hall. 析 在屋内的角落应用in ,而墙的外角用a t,如：There is a tree at the cornerof the street. 误 This weekend 1 ,1 1 stay in Uncle Wangs. 正 This weekend 1 ,1 1 stay

243、 at Uncle Wangs. 析要注意英文的特殊表达法, 如： at a tailors shop （ 裁缝店） =at a tailors,at the doctors （ 去看病） at the booksellers （ 在书店） at uncle Wangs （ 在王叔叔家） 误 D o you know there is some good news on todays newspaper? 正 D o you know there is some good news in todays newspaper? 析 在报纸上的新闻要用in ,而在具体某一版上，或某一页上则要用on。

244、 误 The school will begin on September 1st. 正 School will begin on September 1st. 析 这里的school应看作不可数名词泛指学校的课程，即开学之意。要注意，有些活动场所当表达正在从事该种活动时不要加冠词，如：at table （ 吃饭） ，When I came to Toms home, they were at table.还有：at desk （ 学习） ， at work （ 工作） at school （ 上学） ， in hospital （ 住医院） at church作礼拜 如加上定冠词则另有他意，

245、如：at the school即在学校工作或办事，in the hospital即在医院工作或去看望病人。 析 译文为：在去车站的路上我买了份报纸，为的是消磨时光” 在的路上“ 应用 on onek way。 而 in the way 有挡道之意， 如： Please move the chairit is in the way。 误 Look, the door is open, Maybe someone brokei nto. 正 Look, the door is open, Maybe someone brokei n. 正 Look, the door is open, Maybe

246、 someone brokei nto the office. 析 in是表达一个静止状态，在与break连用时其后不加介词宾语，而 into则是动态介词，与break连用时要加介词宾语。 误 ril leave Beijing to Shanghai tomorrow. 正 ril leave Beijing for Shanghai. 正 ril leave for Shanghai. 析 leave fo r是离开某地去某处的固定搭配，不可将for改为别的介词。这样的搭配还有：start fo r动身前往某处，set out for, sail for。 误 Im sorry. I ha

247、ve to get out the bus at next stop. 正 Im sorry. I have to get out of the bus at next stop. 析 get in ,与 get out是两个相反的词组。 get in 为上车， 而 get out为下车，但语法家认为这里的in与。 ut为副词， 所以其后不能接名词，我们可以讲Wedbetter get in .或 Wed better get out.还有一组词组有关上下车: get on / off(a train,a ship, a struck) get into / out of (a car, ta

248、xi 一 ) 误 Be careful The temperature of the water is ninety degrees over zero. 正 Be careful. The temperature of the water is ninety degrees above zero. 析 over与 above在作为比某物高的意思时有时可以互换。但在垂直方向上的高矮时，即正上方时则要用above.而泛指上方时用over. 误 There is an old stone bridge above the river. 正 There is an old stone bridge

249、over the river. 析 over还有一意为 跨越，横跨” 。 误 The D ead Sea is under the sea level. 正 The D ead Sea is below the sea level. 析 在垂直下方要用below .也就是讲above与below互为反意词， over与under也是反意词。 误 There is a big tree in the front of the house. 正 There is a big tree in front of the house. 析in front o f 是在物体外部的前面， 而 in the

250、front o f 是在物体内部的前面，如：The driver sits in the front of the bus. 误 It took them two days to walk across the forest. 正 It took them two days to walk through the forest. 析across作为介词有两个主要意思： 横过， ： I want to walk across thestreet. 对面，如：There is a post office across the street,而 through 多用于三维空间中的穿越。across则

251、多用于平面上的横过。如：The little girl ran across theroom to meet her mother. 误 The sun sets toward the west. 正 The sun sets in the west. 析towards也可用作tow ard,它主要表达朝向某方向运动， 但不一定到达，如：He ran toward(s) the mountain.而在表示方位 east, west, north, south 时， 其前面要用in。要注意的是这4个词可以用作副词，如：I went sou th .也可用作名词， 如：I went to the

252、south.也可用作形容词， 如：I went to the south part of China. 误 Do you have no other clothes except those? 正 Do you have no other clothes besides those? 析beside 是“ 在. 旁边 ，如 :The students stood beside their teachers.Mbesides是 除. 之外，不仅. 而且. ，除了.以外还有.” ， 如：Istudied English besides French, when I was in co llege.

253、而 except 则是从同一类物体中去掉某一部分， 如：I come here every day except Sunday, ffi except for 是指去掉不同种类的事物，如：The room is clean except for two ch airs.而 except that则要加从句。 误 Can I write the exam paper with ink? 正 Can I write the exam paper with a pen? 正 Can I write the exam paper in ink? 析w ith后要加拿得起来放得下的工具，而墨水、颜料等原

254、料则要用in。 误 Fm earlier today. I came here by his car. 正 Fm earlier today. I came here in his car. 析 在交通工具前加介词b y ,但不能再有任何指示代词或冠词，否则要改换相应的介词。 by taxi=in a taxiby train=in a trainby bicycle=on a bicycleby ship=on a shipby boat=in a boatby bus=on a busby plane=on a planeby a ir空运by la n d陆运by s e a海运on f

255、oot on horsebackby phone by letter by radioby air mail by hand 误 A lot of French wines are made of grape. 正 A lot of French wines are made from grape. 析 made o f 是指由原材料到成品过程中原材料未发生质地的变化，而发生了 某种变化则要用 from,如：The desk was made of hard wood. 误 This is a good dictionary in English grammar. 正 This is a go

256、od dictionary on English grammar. 析关于某方面的书籍、 报告等有两个介词， 其中on表示某专业用书， about则为某方面的普通读物，如：This is a book about physics.即物理科普知识。 误 D o you have the key of the door. 正 D o you have the key to the door. 析key to the door 门的钥匙。 相同用法还有 answer to the question, entrance tothe highway, danger to health.千万不要用 of。

257、 误 Today a lot of Chinese people have interest of collecting stamps. 正 Today a lot of Chinese people have interest in collecting stamps. 析 have interest in是在某方亩有兴趣。 误 I didnt do my homework, so the teacher was angry to me. 正 I didnt do my homework, so the teacher was angry with me. 析be angry with 其后

258、接人， 而 be angry at 其后接事。 如： He was angry at whatshe said. 误 He was good for skating. 正 He was good at skating. 析 be good a t 为“ 擅长某事 ，而 be good for somebody为对某人很好。 误 It was good to you to help my little boy. 正 It was good of you to help my little boy. 析 这句话应译为：你真太凉了，帮助了我的小孩。而 be good to somebody是对某人态

259、度好。如：Her mother is good to everyone. 误 My parents were very pleased at me. 正 My parents were very pleased with me. 正 My parents were very pleased at my studying. 析 be pleased with 后 力 口 somebody,而 be pleased at 后 力 口 something0 误 He is agree with me. 正 He agrees with me. 误 He againsts me. 正 He is ag

260、ainst me. 析 同意agree为动词，而反对against则为介词。 在使用中一定要注意。 误 I havent heard letters from him. 正 I havent heard from him. 析 hear from 即为：从某人处得到信件。不要再加letter 了。 误 Teacher. May I call at you this weekend? 正 Teacher. May I call on you this weekend? 析作为 拜访 讲 call at 其后接地点， 如: May I call at your home this weekend?

261、而 call on其后接人。 误 D o you know the girl on white? 正 D o you know the girl in white? 析 in white为穿一身白。与 in有关的词组有：in bed（ 睡觉） ,in hospital（ 住院） ,in a hurry（ 匆匆忙忙） ,in danger（ 危险中） , in joy （ 高兴） ,in good health（ 身体好） ，in love（ 恋爱） ，in trouble（ 困境） ，与之相反的是 out of,如：out of trouble （ 摆脱困境） ，out of date（ 过时

262、 了） ， out of order（ 出故障） 误 He looked at me at suiprise. 正 He looked at me in surprise. 析 surprise的用法一般有三种。用于句首，To one*s surprise,如：To mysurprise he succeeded. be surprised at, 如：I was surprised at the news. 用于句尾 in surprise. 误 She didn*t come to school because of she was ill. 正 She didn*t come to sc

263、hool because she was ill. 析 because of 后接名词， 如：The game was put off because of the rain.（ 三）例题解析1 - Thank you the beautiful flowers!- Not at all.A in B on C at D for 答案 D . 析 由于某事向某人道谢应用for。2 Can you answer this question English?A by B in C with D from 答案 B. 析in 表示用语言、 声音、 或材料， 如： He answered the qu

264、estion in a low voice.3 Look the map China the wall, please.A after, of, in B at, of, inC after, in, on D at, of, on 答案 D . 析 look a t为“ 看“ ，而 on the wall为” 在墙表面挂着 ，T fi in the w all则是在墙内” , 如 ：There is hole in the wall.墙上有个洞。4 - When did Mr Green arrive in London?- He arrived there the evening of D

265、 ecember 6th.A at B in C on D to 答案 C. 析 in the evening / afternoon这两个词组不论是在其前或后加上任何修饰词都应将介词换为 on,如：on a cold morning, on a spring morning 等。5 We won the relay race. And there was a big smile our teachefs face.A off B near C on D between 答案 C.6 The twins got on well their classmates.A to B in C with

266、 D about 答案 C. 析 get on well with与人相处很好。7 - Please remember to come to my birthday party.- 1 see. Ell come Saturday evening.A in B at C on D for 答案 C.8 Lets hurry, or we*ll be late schoolA to B at C with D for 答案 D . 析 be late for, 而 come late to, 如： D ont come late to school9 They will have a maths

267、 test two daysA for B at C in D after 答案1 C. 析 三天之内应用i n ,而不要受中文影响用after, after three days是个不定的时间范围，即没有一个准确的时间。 5 天、 6 天、10天全是after three days。10 My brother joined the armyA 1989, March B in March, 1989C March, 1989 D 1989, in March 答案B, 析 在月份、年、前用介词i n ,而日子前用。 n。11 He couldnt work out the maths pro

268、blem your helpA without B under C for D with 答案 A. 析在某人帮助下应用 w ith,如： With the help of the teacher I passed the exameasily 而要是没有你的帮助则用without your help12 Granny took one look at us her glassesA by B through C on D in 答案 B. 析 through为穿过. . .。13 We had our breakfast a q u a r t e r sevenA /, to B in,

269、to C at, to D on, to 答案 c.m 具体时间点前用a t,而差几分几点用t。 ，这里应译为：我在差一刻七点吃的早饭。14 I learn French the radio every dayA on B in C from D at 答案 A. 析 从收音机中听到某事应用词组on the radioo15 It*s good manners to wait lineA in B on C at D with 答案 A. 析 in line为排队。16 How many English words had you learnt last term?A by the end o

270、f B at the end ofC to the end of D till the end of 答案 A. 析 by the end o f 为动作的截止时间，与完成时态相配合17 The manager was very satisfied his workA in B on C about D with 答案 D . 析 be satisfied w ith为固定搭配。18 John hit Jack faceA on the B in the C on his D in his 答案B. 京 英文中的某些动词其后要接人，然后加介词+ the+身体部位，如：Hecaught the

271、boy by the arm。19 I was born the night September 15, 1978A in, on B at, on C at, in D on, of 答案D. 加 在时间前加介词时应以最小的时间单位为准。20 Its a bad manner to laugh people when they are troubleA over, in B at, in C in, at D at, for 答案 B. 析 laugh a t嘲笑某人， laugh over笑着谈论某人或某事， in trouble陷入困境。21 I can*t do this work w

272、ell Toms helpA under B for C without D from 答案 C.22 D ont shout the old woman o You should be more polite herA to, at B at, to C in, for D from, for 答案 B. 析 shout a t 为 冲某人喊叫 ，而 be polite to somebody为” 对某人和气。23 We must be strict our selves everythingA with, in B in, with C with, to D to, of 答案 A. 析

273、be strict with对某人严格要求。24 He went to the football match lunch last SundayA to B without C behind D between 答案 B. 析 without lunch未吃午饭。25 The peopled Republic of China was founded 1949A with B on C since D in 答案D. 加 在年代前用in。因句子是过去时而不是完成时，所以不能用since。26 Mr Black got to Hangzhou a few daysA in B after C o

274、n D at 答案 B. 析 这句话应译为：几天之后Mr Black到达了杭州。而不是在几天之内一定要做完某事，所以选B。27 - Has the teacher given you any advice your English study?-Yes, he hasA from B with C on D in 答案c. 析 给予某一方面问题的忠告其介词用on。28 You may depend him He is honest manA on, a B in, an C on, an D at, the 答案c. 析depend o n为 依靠某人或某事 ，而honest的首字母h不发音。

275、29 my joy, I can answer this questionA With B ToC By D For 答案B. 析To ones jo y意为 使我高兴的是。30 The teacher asked the students to look the word in the dictionaryA for B at C up D after 答案C. 析look for 寻找，look at 看，look after 照顾，look up 查字典。31_ A little monkey is playing a tree and there are a lot of banana

276、s _ itA on, on B in, on C on in D in, in 答案B. 析树上长出的果实为on the tree 而其他外来之物要用in the t r e e ,表达在树上。32 I go to school bus every morning.A. in B. by C. on D . at 答案B. 析b y后直接加交通工具，表示乘某种交通工具去某地。33 No one likes a person bad manners.A. without B. on C. out of D . with 答案D . 析with bad m anners有不良习惯的人。34 Th

277、e policeman was surprised the news.A. into B. for C. at D . out of 答案C. 析be surprised a t对某事吃惊。35 He had to sell newspapers seven.A. at an age of B. at the ages of C. at the age of D . at age of 答案 c. 析 at the age o f 在几岁时。36 The little girl couldnt help when she saw a large dog.A. cried B. to cry C

278、. crying D . cries 答案Q 析 couldnlhelp+动名词表示情不自禁地去做某事，或禁不住做某事。37 Jack was born March 1st, 1978.A. on B. in C. at D . of 答案A. 薛 、日期，时间前的介词按其表达语中的最小单位计算。38 Edison was very interested science when he was a boy.A. to B. on C. in D . about 答案 C. 析 be interested in something 对某事感兴趣。39 The teacher was very s

279、atisfied her answer.A. in B. on C. for D . with 答案 D ,40 The story happened Beijing.A. in B. with C. for D . on 答案 A.七、 数 词( - ) 知识概要数词用来表示人或物的数目多少和顺序。所以数词主要有两种：基数词，用于计数， 如： one, two而序数词用于表示位置先后或次序， 台： first second-其构成法如下：阿拉伯数字基数词序数词简写序数词1 one first 1st2 two second 2nd3 three third 3rd4 four fourth

280、4th5 five fifth 5th6 six sixth 6th7 seven seventh 7th8 eight eighth 8th9 nine ninth 9th10 ten tenth 10th11 eleven eleventh 11th12 twelve twelfth 12th13 thirteen thirteenth 13th14 fourteen fourteenth 14th15 fifteen fifteenth 15th16 sixteen sixteenth 16th17 seventeen seventeenth 17th18 eighteen eighte

281、enth 18yh19 nineteen nineteenth 19th20 twenty twentieth 20th21 twenty-one twenty-first 21st30 thirty thirtieth 30th40 forty fortieth 40th50 fifty fiftieth 50th60 sixty sixtieth 60th70 seventy seventieth 70th80 eighty eightieth 80th90 ninety ninetieth 90th100 a(one)hundred hundredth 100th104 one hund

282、red and four hundred and fourth 104th1000 a(one) thounsand thounsandth 1000th10000 ten thounsand ten thounsandth 10000th1000000 one million millionth 1000000th基数词与序数词都有一定的构成方法，但都有特殊例外的几个字，所以除了要学会一般构成法之外，还要特别记熟一些例外。因它们在考试中出现的频率很高。1 基数词构成结构219 9 的两位数字，在 10位和个位之间加连字符构成,如89-eighty-nine.1 0 1 9 9 9 的三位数字

283、， 由hundred加 and再加二位数或未位数冬， 如：101-one hundred and one, 223-two hundred and twenty-three.四位以上数字，应从个位起向前数三位加逗号， 读作thousand,再数三位加第二个逗号， 读作million,再数三位加逗号，读作billion,其读法如下：1001-one thousand and one 5 3 8 6 -five thousand, three hundred and eightysix 要注意的是hundred, thousand, million与billion的用法。前面有别的基数词时,即若干

284、个百、 千、 百万、 十亿时， 其本身都不要加s ,如: three hundredstudentso若表示成百，成千或数百，数千时，前面不能有基数词，但其本身要用复数形式，然后+of+名词复数。如：thousands and thousands of。 ( 成千上万)2 序数词的构成法序数词除first, second, third以外， 其余一般在词尾加th构成，除一般略有差异的各别数词外，很容易掌握。其二位数或多位数只将后面的个位数字改为序数词，其前面各位数字均不改变，都用基数词。3 其他数字表示法（ 二）正误辨析 误 1107 should be read as a thousand

285、a hundred as seven. 正 1107 should be read as one thousand one hundred and seven. 析 在读数字时， 如： and前只有百或千时， 用one hundred/one thousand还是a hundred/a thousand全是可以的。但如果文有百又有千时，则只能用one不要用a0如果没有and时， 如：1100也只能读作one thousand one hundred或eleven hundred. 误 I drove about half mile. 正 I drove about half a mile. 析

286、 半小时为half an hour,半天为half a day,半镑为half a pound,尽量避免用 half a year, half a month,要用 six months, two weeks 或 fifteen days 要注意的是 Half of the work is done Half of the books are sold.当 Half 作名词时， 其谓语动词要看。 f 后面的名词而定。如名词是不可数名词则用单数谓语动词，如是复数名词时，则要用复数谓语动词。要注意的是一个半的表达法，如：One and a half叩pies is left on the tabl

287、e. 其名词要用复数，但谓语动词则要用单数。 误 60 students are playing on the ground. 正 Sixty students are playing on the ground. 析 在句首的数字要用文字而不要用阿拉伯数字，如数字过大则应放于句中，用阿拉伯数字。如 I ： There are 166 students playing on the ground. 误 He became famous around fifty years old. 正 He became famous in his fifties. 析 in his fifties 50 多

288、岁时,而 in the fifties 在 50 年代。 误 There are about two thousands workers in our factory. 正 There are about two thousand workers in our factory 析 几千，几百的表达法是基数词加thousand或加hundred,而且均不要加 s。这样的单位还有dozen（ 打） ， score （ 20年） 等。 误 In the morning there are hundred of old people walking in the park. 正 In the morn

289、ing there are hundreds of old people walking in the park. 析 当表达数百，数千时，要用hundreds of和 thousands o f 这一结构。 误 The class begins at eight a. m. 正 The class begins at 8 a. m. 析与符号或与缩写的字母连用时一定要用数字， 如： 43%, 67 , No.2- 误 Two fifth of the books are sold out. 正 Two fifths of the books are sold out. 析 分数表示法，分子用

290、基数词，分母用序数词，但分子大于1时，分母要在序数词后加s。 误 Tom was bom on July eighteen.正析 rL1J TJ 1J TJ nJ _IJ误正析误正析rL rL rL rL rL rLTom was bom on July eighteenth.月日的表达法有美语和英语两种。 美语July 18读作July英语 July 18th 读作 July the eighteenthIll go to school at 7 I 3 0 a. m. in the morning.Fil go to school at 7 I 3 0 a. m/ at 7 ： 3 0 i

291、n the morning.a. m即表达在早上之意，不要再用in the morning.The film will begin at three quarters past one.The film will begin at one quarter to two.大于30分钟时不要使用past,而要用差多少不到几点的t。来表达。算法种类例句加法 一般 Five and six is eleven.正式 Five plus six is (equals) eleven.减法一般 Eight take away four leaves (is) four.Four from Eight le

292、aves (is) four.正式 Eight minus four equals (is) four.乘法一般 Three fours are twelve 3X4=12一般 Two in to four is two.正式 Four divided by two equals two.(三)例题解析1 - How many students are there in your school, Mike?-There are over students in our school.A. two thousandsB. two thousands ofC. two thousandD. two

293、 thousand of答案C.析有基数词在前面时thousand, hundred等词不能加s,也不能加of结构，只有在thousands of时才可以使用。2 John lives on floor. He doesn*t use a lift to go up and down.A. nineB. the ninthC. ninthD. a ninth答案B.析序数词前加定冠词，nine与ninth的拼写上有一个e字母相差别。3 Wu Dong won the girls race in the school sports meeting lastweek.A. 100 metresB.

294、 100 metresC. 100 metreD . 100 metre 答案 D . 析 数词、名词、形容词等词用连字符连接成的形容词中，名词都不要加 s , 如： I have to write a two thousand word report.而且由连字符组成的形容词只能放于名词前，不能放于名词后， 作后置定语，或用在be动词后作表语。4 There are students in our school.A. four hundred twentyB. four hundred and twentyC. four hundreds twentyD . four hundreds an

295、d twenty 答案 B.5 - How many days are there in a year?-There are .A. three hundreds and sixty fiveB. three hundreds sixty fiveC. three hundred and sixty fiveD . three hundred sixty five 答案 C.6 We have learned about English words.A. nine hundredsB. nine hundredC. nine hundred ofD . nine hundreds of 答案

296、B.7 Autumn is season of the year.A. thirdB. the threeC. thirdsD . the third 答案 D .8 They are learning now.A. Lesson EightB. the eight lessonC. Lesson EiththD . Eighth lesson 答案 A. 析 第几课，第几个门. . .，在英语中有两种说法，Lesson Two, GateTwo但要注意每一单词的首字母要大写。the second lesson, the second gate首字母不要大写，并要注意有些缩写的读法。如：p.

297、8- 第 8 页(page eight)$ 8.50-8.5 美元(five dollars and fifty)电话号码 66164532 (six, six, one, six, four five, three, two)9 The boy was so hungry that he ate .A. three bowls of ricesB. three bowl of riceC. three bowl of ricesD . three bowls of rice 答案D . 析rice是不可数物质名词，而bowl是可数名词。10 There are months in a yea

298、r.A. twelveB. twelfC. twelvethD . twelfth 答案A.八、 动 词( )知识概要动词在语言中是必不可少的一部分。它的语法现象也较多，但在初中范围主要有以下几方面问题。 时 态 ：初中范围主要有一般现在时，一般过去时，现在完成时，过去完成时，将来时与过去将来时六种时态。 语态：主动语态与被动语态。助动词和情态动词。 非 谓 语 动 词 ，也就是不定式，动名词及现在分词的用法。时态主要掌握以下几种时态的应用要点和习惯用法。1 一般现在时：主要有以下三方面，用来表示状态，特征或不受时间限制的客观存在和真理。如：Matter exists in three sta

299、tes物质有三态。又如：Theearth moves around the sun 表 示习惯性和经常发生的动作， 如：I oftengo to bed at 9 ： 3 0 在 时 间 、条件等状语从句中表示将来要发生的动作，如：As soon as I get there Ill telephone you.2 一般过去时：主要用于表达过去时间内发生的动作或存在的状态，如： I was ill last week 过去经常发生的动作或习惯性动作， 如： I used to getup at six.3 一般将来时： 用于表示将要发生的动作， 其构成方式用wiH(shall)+动词原形来表达

300、将来在某一时间内要发生，或经常、将要发生的动作或状态，如：School will begin on Sepember 1st 用 be going to+动词原形，用来表示不久将要发生或打算去作的动作。如：Im going to swim this afternoon be+现在分词，也就是用某些动词的现在进行时表示将来，如：Imcomingo 这些动词只限于：go, come, leave, start, move, sail, arrive, reach, get to等动词。在状语从句中用一般现在时表示将来。 4 现在进行时： 用于表示现在正在进行的动作， 如： What are you

301、 doing now?要注意的是表示状态，情感的某些词没有现在进行时，这些动词有：like, have（ 有） ，love, know, understand, remember, forget, see, hear, smell, taste, feel, wishhope, expect-5 过去将来时：用来表达从过去某时间点上看将要发生的动作，如： Hetold me he would come to my partyHearing the noise, we stopped talking.（ 状语）（ -）正误辨析 误 She laid down and soon fell asle

302、ep. 正 She lay down and soon fell asleep. 析 考试中常出现的是易混动词lay放， lie躺， lie说谎。它们的过去时、过去分词和现在分词变化如下：lay （ 放） laid, laid, laying （ 及物动词）lie （ 躺） lay, lain, lying （ 不及物动词）lie （ 说谎） lied, lied, lying 误 Please rise your hand. 正 Please raise your hand. 析 rise是不及物动词，其后不能接宾语，如：The sun rises in the east.而 raise是及

303、物动词。 误 I like to swim very much, but I dont like swimming this afternoon. 正 I like swimming very much, but I dont like to swim this afternoon. 析 like作为“ 喜欢“ 讲时，可以接动名词也可以接不定式，但接动名词时多表达一种习惯性动作。而接不定式则侧重于表达一次性、特殊性的动作。但要注意的是like与would连用时则一定要接不定式， 如： Would you like togo with me? 再有一点要注意的是，like作为介词 像 讲时，只能

304、用分词作其宾语。 误 Stop! D id you listen to a strange voice? 正 Stop! D id you hear a strange voice? 析 hear的侧董点是听到、听见什么，而 listen t o 的侧重点为听的倾向，如：listen! D o you hear someone calling help?这样的词还有 look 与 see。它们的侧重点也不同，look重于 看” 的倾向，而 see重于看见没看见。 误 D id you watch some film recently? 正 D id you see some film rece

305、ntly? 析 英语中see与 watch各有不同的用处，see用于看电影、剧目，而watch用作看电视和看球赛。 误 Look. A beautiful lamp hanged from the ceiling. 正 Look. A beautiful lamp hung from the ceiling. 析 hang有两个含义， 挂; 它的过去时与过去分词是hung, hung; “ 绞刑” ，这时它是规则动词，其过去式与过去分词则为hanged, hangedo 误 How long can I borrow this book? 正 How long can I keep this

306、book? 析 借” 在英文中有三个词， 借入，即borrow,如：May I borrow somebooks from the library? 借出， 如： I can lend my bike to you. 借多久要用 keep,因为borrow与 lend都是截止性动词，而 keep是延续性动词。如 How long canI keep it? 误 We have won your class. 正 We have beaten your class. 析 w in是及物动词，其后面的宾语应是比赛、战争、奖品、奖金。而beat的宾语，应是人、队、班级等等，如：We won the

307、game. 误 I left my key. 正 I forgot my key. 正 I left my key at home. 析 leave是“ 丢下” ，其后一定要接地点状语，而 forget其后不要接地点状语。 误 Oh! Its raining outside. Please bring the rain coat with you. 正 Oh! Its raining outside. Please take this rain coat with you. 误 The policeman reached his gun. 正 The policeman reached for

308、 his gun. 析 reach作” 到达” 讲时是及物动词，如：I reached the hotel at 8 * 30但作“ 伸手去拿 ，则要用reach for something0作为 到达” 讲时还有arrive （ in+大地方） （ at+较小的地方） 和 get to.要注意的是与get有关的词组有： get back回 来 get in 收 割 get into进 入 get o ff下车 get o n 上 车 get o u t出去getup 起床 get to 至达 get ready for=be ready for get on well with 与人相处施洽

309、 g et加比较级为变得如何，例如： get colder and colder. 误 This dictionary spent me five dollars. 正 This dictionary cost me five dollars. 析 英文中的 花飘 有4 个spend, cost, take和 pay,其中spend与 pay所在句中的主语应为人，如：I spent two hours in doing my homework. I paid fivedallars for the book.而 cost 与 take 的主语则是事物, 如：It takes me two ye

310、ars tofinish this book. 误 In summer I always sleep with the windows opened. 正 In summer I always sleep with the windows open. 正 I always sleep with the windows closed. 析 要注意open是动词也是形容词，而 close则要用其过去分词作形容I司o 误 Please wait a minute. Pm having on my clothes. 正 Please wait a minute. Tm putting on my cl

311、othes. 析 英语中的穿衣服要分状态，是什么样的穿着打扮，还是穿衣服的动作两类动词。表示穿着状态的词有have on, wear,在用法上have on不宜用进行时态，它多用一般时态，如：She has on a new school dress.而wear则多用进行时来表示状态，如：She is wearing a new sweater.在表示动作的词中put on是常用的一词。dress用作动词当“ 穿衣” 讲时其后宾语不应接衣物，叫要接人，如：My children were very young they couldnt dress themselves.在表示穿着状态时用其过去

312、分词当形容词，如 :He is dressed in white. 误 My computer cant begin. Could you find someone to help me? 正 My computer cant start. Could you find someone to help me? 析begin与start均可指“ 开始 ，而且常常可以互换，如：School begins(starts) at 8 a. m .但是在两种情况下不宜用begin而要用start,当作机器开动、发动讲，如：My car cant start. There must be somethin

313、g wrong with it. 作为“ 旅途开始” 讲， 如：We should have to start early. There was a lot of traffic on theroad. 误 Im very glad because I have founded my lost key. 正 Im very glad because I have found my lost key. 析find是不规则动词， 它的过去式和过去分词是found, found,而found又是另外一词“ 建立 ，它是规则动词，其过去式与过去分词是founded founded,如：The Peop

314、les Republic of China was founded in 1949. 误 Please. Lets speak in English. 正 Please. Lets speak English. 正 Please. Lets talk in English. 误 Can you speak it English? 正 Can you say it in English? 析英文中” 说 谙4个常用词say, tell, speak, talk.其中不及物动词有speak和 talk, 如：I want to talk with you.We are talking about

315、the new film.而 speak 其后接语言时是及物动词，其他情况是不及物动词。sa y与te ll是及物动词，其中tell常用双宾语，如：Tell us a story. 但用于讲实话或谎话时也用单宾语。如：Tell the truth. 误 Can you say Japanese from Chinese? 正 Can you tell Japanese from Chinese? 析 ten from为固定词组，即分辨两者的不同。 误 Excuse me, did I step on your foot? 正 Oh, sorry, did I step on your foot

316、? 析excuse me用于未打扰对方前，以提醒对方注意的用语，而sorry则是由于自己已做的事向对方道歉。 误 Would you care for to swim with us? 正 Would you care to swim with us? 析 care fo r后接不定式时，要省略for,或换用名词，如：Would you carefor a cup of tea. care fo r作“ 照顾 讲时与look after相同。在初中阶段学习与for有关的词组有：ask fo r请 求 call fo r接人，请 人 care fo r关心go in for 从事 answer

317、for 负责 look for 寻找wait for 等待 send for 请人 pay for 付款search for 寻找 leave for 去某地 prepare for 准备thank somebody for something 为某事向某人道谢。 误 Are you understanding it? Yes, I got to it. 正 D o you understand it? Yes, I got it. 析 understand这一词没有进行时态，如同感观动词love、hate I got it是美语， 即I understood it。 要记住g et作为“ 到

318、达” 讲时是不及物动词， 如： Fil getto the school at 8 a. m. 初中范围常用与to有关的动词词组如下： belong to属 于 come to 苏 醒 point to (at)指着 get to 到 达 refer to 谈 到 stick to 坚持lead to 导致 turn to 翻到 look forward to 期望 agree to 同意 误 The meat has gone badly. 正 The meat has gone bad. 析 英语中go, get, become, turn作为转变时，其后接形容词，这时这些动词应被看作系动

319、词。 误 The teacher said the earth moved around the sun. 正 The teacher said the earth moves around the sun. 析 如果主句的谓语动词是现在时，其宾语从句可以是任何时态。如果是过去时，则宾语从句中的时态应与之呼应。但地球围绕太阳转是不随时间而变化的客观事实，所以还应用一般现在时态来表达。 误 ril come to see you as soon as ril be back. 正 Hlcometo see you as soon as I am back. 析 在状语从句中要用一般时来表示将来，

320、如：I should tell him when hecame back. 误 I want to know whether you come to my party tomorrow or not. 正 I want to know whether you will come to my party tomorrow or not. 析 在宾语从句中则要用将来时表示将来的动作。要注意的是如果宾语从句中仍有状语从句时， 依然要用一般现在时表示将来， 1 ： I want to know if itrains tomorrow youll come here or not. 误 What did

321、 you do at eight last night? 正 What were you doing at eight last night? 析 在描述过去某一具体时刻的动作或从某时到某时一段时间内正在进行的动作要用过去进行时, 如：I was washing clothes from eight till noon lastSunday 误 My classmates came to see a film yesterday. I didn*t go with them, becauseI have seen it before. 正 My classmates came to see a

322、 film yesterday. I didnt go with them becauseI had seen it before. 析 现在完成时与过去完成时的相同之处是其动作均开始于过去的某一点， 它的差别在于该动作是截止到什么时候。 如动作截止到现在用现在完成时；如动作截止到过去，用过去完成时。例如：Pve learnt English for three years. （ 到现在为止） 又如： Before I went to college, I had leamt English for three years.（ 动作截止到上大学那时，即截止于过去） 误 Im feeling w

323、ell now. 正 I feel well now. 析 瞬间动词有些无进行时态，它们是： 表示思维状态的词：believe,feel, forget, imagine, know, mean, need, prefer, remember, understand, want 表示感情的动词： care, like, do like, love, mind, hate, fear 表示状态的词： belong,own 感观动词： feel, hear, see, smell, taste 误 When have you done this work? 正 When did you do th

324、is work? 析 when提问的是一个时间点不可用于完成时态的问句中。 误 This is our new English teacher. He has gone to many foreign countries. 正 This is our new English teacher. He has been to many foreign countries. 析 have gone to 是到某地去了，此人现在不在这里。have been to 是到过某地，现在此人在说话现场。 误 I have borrowed this book for two weeks. 正 I have k

325、ept this book for two weeks. 析 截止性动词有完成时态， 但不可和与表达一段时间的时间状语连用。如：When I got to the cinema the film had begun. 但要讲 When I got to thecinema the film had be on for five minutes 这样的用法还有 buy, join, die,如：Ibought this book yesterday.我昨天买的这本书。 I have had this book for twodays.这本书我已买了两天了。I joined the club tw

326、o years ago.两年前我加入了这个俱乐部。I have been in this club for two years.我加入这个俱乐部已两年了。My father died five years ago.我父亲是5 年前去世的。My father has been dead for five years.我父亲已去世 5 年了。 误 Have you understood the lessons? 正 D o you understand the lessons? 析有些动词不易用完成时态， 它们是understand, think, believe, know （ 知道） 误 It

327、 was said that the Second World War had broken out in 1939. 误 It was said that the Second World War was broken out in 1939. 析在讲述过去的历史事件时， 总要用过去时而不要用完成时， 而且happen,break out, take place作为发生讲时均没有被动语态。 误 When I walked along the street. I happened to meet an old friend. 正 When I was walking along the str

328、eet I happened to meet an old friend. 析 在一个长动作发生或进行的过程中，某一突然事件发生，这时长动作应用进行时（ 现在进行时或过去进行时） ，而突发性动作用一般时（ 一般现在时或般过去时） ， 如： When my father is reading a newspaper the telephone rings. 误 Please buy a book for me. 正 Please buy me a book. 正 Please buy a book to me. 析 在接双宾语的动词后面的两个宾语，一个是直接宾语，一个是间接宾语，如：Buy me

329、 a book中me是间接宾语，而 abook是直接宾语。如果将直接宾语前置， 其后应加 to ,如：Tell me a story. Tell a story to me. Give me a book.Give a book to me. 误 He was seen come into the book store. 正 He was seen to come into the book store. 析 在主动语态中，有时可以加不带to 的不定式作宾语，如：I saw himcome into the book store. 但如果变为被动语态时, 则要将省略的to还原。当然这些动词还可

330、以加动名词作宾语，如： I saw him coming into the book store,如变为被动语态时，则没有变化。如：He was seen coming into the book store. 误 How nice the book is! Is it sold well? 正 How nice the book is! D oes it sell well? 析 有些动词可以表示一种动作，但也可以用来表示某种性质，表示动作时可用被动语态，在表示性质时则不可用被动语态。如：This book sells well.这本书畅销。This car drives easily.这车

331、容易驾驶。These clothes wash easily.这些衣服好洗。在作上述表达时，不要用被动语态。而要讲：This kind of book was sold out. （ 这种书卖完了）These clothes were washed by the washing machine.这时要用被动语态，因为它描述的是具体动作。 误 Must I do it now?No. you mustnt. 正 Must I do it now? No, you neednt. 析 need用在疑问句和否定句中常用作情态动词，其后接不带to 的不定式。由must提问的问句作答语时，如是肯定的要用

332、must,否定的要用needn匕即为没有必要。在肯定句中常用作实意动词，如：I need to wait for my boy. 误 Is this book yours?Yes, Its. 正 Is this book yours?Yes, It is. 析 在肯定的回答中不要用缩写形式，而在否定的回答中可以用缩写形式，如：No. It isn*t. 误 Fil have my bike repair tomoiTow. 正 Fil have my bike repaired tomorrow. 析have+人+ 动词原形晟现在分词意为： 让某人作某事， 如： My father hadme

333、 to learn how to drive, 或 My father had me doing my homework from morningtill might have+物+ 动词的过去分词为某件事被别人完成。如：I have myhair cut.我去理发。而不是自己理发。如果讲我想自己作某事，则用I want torepair my bike myself. 误 Fil get my brother repair the bike for you. 正 PH get my brother to repair the bike for you. 析 have与 get的用法有相同之处

334、，也有不同之处。相同之处，如：havesomething done,也可用 get something done,或 have (get) somebody doingsomething但不同之处在于have somebody do something在用get时则要用getsomebody to do something o 误 I have to study on Saturday but I havent to study a full day 正 I have to study on Saturday, but I dont have to study a full day. 析 ha

335、ve to 不得不，而dont have to 为其否定式。 误 Is Tom in the classroom? No. He mustnt be in the classroom, because Isaw him talking with our teacher in the office just now. 正 Is Tom in the classroom? No. He cant be in the classroom because I sawhim talking with our teacher in the office just now. 析 m ust加动词原形表达一种

336、比较肯定的推测，而表示否定的推测则要用 cant o 误 My grandpa is over eighty but he is able to read without glasses. 正 My grandpa is over eighty, but he can read without glasses. 析 can (could)多用于表达客观的事实，主观能力，而be able to 则多用于表达主观的意愿。 误 She doesnt answer the doorbell. She should be asleep. 正 She doesnt answer the doorbell.

337、 She must be asleep 析should用于现在时态的句子中应译为“ 应该 ， 如： You should do yourhomework right away.而 must加动词原形表示一种推测。 误 D o you like to go with us? 正 Would you like to go with us? 析 D o you like* , , 问的是习惯，如：D o you like swimming?而 would youlike是一次性的邀请。 误 I am used to get up early in the morning. 正 I am used t

338、o getting up early in the morning. 析 used to 共有三种用法， 表示过去的习惯，如：I used to live withmy parents. 表示 过去的习惯延续到现在，$ ： lam used to swimming inthe river. 用于被动语态，如： Oil is used to cook 误 To play with the children are very interesting. 正 To play with the children is very interesting. 析 不定式作主语时，应视为单数主语，特别是两个不定

339、式用and作连词作主语时， 如指的是一件事也应用单数谓语动词。 如： To get up early and to goto sleep early is good for your health. 误 He asked me do my homework alone. 正 He asked me to do my homework alone. 析 某些动词要求不定式作其宾语或宾语补足语， 它们是： ask somebodyto do something要求某人做某事。tell somebody to do something告诉某人做某事 还有prepare准备， decide决定， ha

340、ppen to 碰巧， seem似乎。 误 he told me to drive a car. 正 He told me how to drive a car. 析 要笔会疑问词加不定式的用法，特别要注意的是what是疑问代词，而 how是疑问副词。 如： I want to know what to do.（ 我想知道干什么） 。I want toknow how to do it.（ 我想知道如何去作） 。 要注意的是how to do i t 中的it是不可少的，因 how是疑问副词，不能作及物动词的宾语，而 what是疑问代词，可做do的宾语，所以what to d o 后不要加it

341、。 误 I am very glad meeting you. 正 I am very glad to meet you. 析 许多形容词后加不定式， 这样用时形容词多是用来描述人物的感情、态度，如：glad, happy, pleased, lucky, sorry, sad, upset, ready, careful, surprised o 误 Im too glad for seeing you. 正 Fm too glad to see you. 析 这句话不能按照to o -to 的句型翻译为：我太高兴了以至于不想见你。而应译为：见到你太高兴了。又如：She is too hon

342、est to tell the truth 应译为：她很诚实，不会不讲实话。 误 Tom is too young not to join the army. 正 Tom is too young to join the army. 析 这是toot。的正常用法，太如何如何以至于不能如何。 误 I went to the hospital for seeing my old friend. He was ill in hospital. 正 I went to the hospital to see my old friend. He was ill in hospital. 析 在句中表示某

343、动作的目的时，要用不定式而不能用for加动名词。 误 Could you help me to find a chair to sit. 正 Could you help me to find a chair to sit on. 析 当不定式作后置定语时，将不定式放于名词之后。如果不定式中的动词是不及物动词，则其后面的介词不要省略。如： I sat on the chair.这样的用法还有：I want to find a room to live in. I want to find a pen to write with. 误 When mother was about leaving

344、the baby cried suddenly. 正 When mother was about to leave the baby cried suddenly. 析 be about。 是表达较近的即将发生的动作，可用来表示将来时，或按计划、安排的事。 误 This work is difficult to be done. 正 This work is difficult to do. 析 在不定式作宾语时，下列情况常用主动语态表示被动。句子的主语 即 是 不 定 式 动 作 的 执 行 者 ,： I have a lot of letters to write. 句中的宾语是不定式中动

345、作的执行者， 如：Could you find me a job to do? 在形容词之后的不定式，如：English is difficult to learn. 误 Would you like to see a film with us? Yes, Fd love. 正 Would you like to see a film with us? Yes, Id love to. 析 在口语简答语中要将不定式符号保留， 如：I had to （ 不得不作）1mgoing to （ 打算作）I used to （ 过去习惯作）Id love to （ 喜欢作）I hope to （ 希望作

346、某事）Hl be glad to （ 高兴作） 误 D id you see someone to do this work for me? 正 D id you see someone do this work for me? 析 在感观动词之后常接不带to的不定式。这些词是see, look at, watch,hear, listen to, feel, noticeo 误 He was seen prepare this car. 正He was seen to prepare this car. 析 误 正 析 误 正在被动语态中要将主动语态句中省去的不定式还原回来。Please L

347、et my child to try it again.Please Let my child try it again.在make, have, let后加不带to的不定式作宾语补足语。Why not to do it again?Why not do it again? 析Why not, you*d better 后接不带 to 的不定式，如：You*d better go.B要注意的是它而否定式是Youd better not go. 误 When he heard the news he couldnt help to cry. 正 When he heard the news he

348、 couldn*t help crying. 析cant help+现在分词表示情不自禁作橐事。 误 In autumn, the street is always covered with falling leaves. 正 In autumn, the street is always covered with fallen leaves. 析 现在分词作定语有正在的含义，如：falling leave正下落的叶子。而过去分词作定语fallen leaves是落地的叶子。过去分词含有已经完成的意思。 误 正D o you hear someone sing in the office?D

349、o you hear someone singing in the office? 析 感观动词可用不带to的不定式来作宾语补足语，表达一个动作的全过程或已结束的动作，而用现在分词表示一个正在进行中的动作。 误 正 正I want to shop some food for supper.I want to buy some food for supper.I want to go shopping. 析 shop作买东西讲时，要用go shopping,其后不要加所购买的东西。这样的用法还有： go boating划 船 go sailing航 海 go skating滑冰 goshooti

350、ng 射击 go dancing 去跳舞 go fishing 钓鱼 go swimming 去游泳. . .不要用错，也不要改为其他式，因为这是习惯用法。 误 When the teacher came into the classroom, the students stopped to talk. 正 When the teacher came into the classroom, the students stopped talking. 析 stop to do something 是停下来去做某事，而 stop doing something 则是停止做某事。 误 I didnt

351、 remember closing the door, so the thief came into the roomdirectly. 正 I didnt remember to close the door, so the thief came into the roomdirectly. 析 remember后接不定式是记着去做某事，即该动作并没有完成。而remember后接动名词则表明该动作已经作完了。如： D o remember to turn offthe light, before you leave.即在你离开前记着去关灯。而关灯的动作并没有做。I remember meet

352、ing you somewhere.我记得在某处见过你。 而相见一事已经作完了。相同用法还有forget。 误 When I finished to do this work I would go to play football. 正 When I finished doing this work I would go to play football. 析 在英语中有些动词后要接动名词作宾语。在初中范围主要有两个动词 finish和 enjoy,千万不要与like相比。因为like作动词“ 喜欢” 用时, 其后接动名词表示习惯性动作，接不定式表示一次性特殊的动作，而 would you l

353、ike后面则一定要用不定式。 误 When he finished his homework, he went on playing the football. 正 When he finished his homework, he went on to play football. 析go on to do something是做完一件事紧跟着做另一件事。 而 go on doingsomething是在做一件事的过程中被打断后接着再继续做这件事。 误 Hes busy to prepare his lessons. 正 Hes busy preparing his lessons. 析 b

354、e busy后加doing而不能接不定式。（ 三）例题解析1 Mr Zhang asked me the words again.A. readB. readsC. to readD . reading 答案 C. 析 ask somebody to do something 要求某人作某事。2 You play on the road. Its dangerous.A. mustntB. mayC. canD . must 答案A. i f f m ust用于否定句表示禁止做某事。3 Mr Brown in Beijing since 1993.A. workB. worksC. worke

355、dD . has worked 答案 D . 析 句中有since引导的时间状语，因此句中要用完成时态。4 I a letter when my mother came in.A. writeB. am writingC. was writingD . will write 答案 C, 析 当母亲进来时是一个瞬时的动作，而写信是一个长动作，所以写信这个动作应用过去进行时态，表示在写信过程中发生的另一个短动作。5 Its not an important party, you neednt .A. pay for itB. wear it outC. try it outD . dress up

356、 for it 答豪 D. 析 pay for-为某物，某人付款，wear out-穿坏，磨破，tryout-选拔，挑选，而 dress up梳妆打扮。6 Can I a bike from him?A. lendB. returnC. giveD . borrow 答案 D . 析 borrow something from为向某人某处借某物。而 lend, return, give后面的介词应用too J7 - Must I stay at home?- No, you .A. mustntB. needntC. may notD . can not 答案 B. 析 neednt为 没有必

357、要必须做某事 ，而 mustnt为 禁止做 ，can not为 不能做 。根据题意是：你不一定待在家里。8 - How long have you here?- About two months.A. beenB. goneC. comeD . arrived 答案 A. 析 have been here是个状态，可以与后面的长时间状语连接，而其他三个动词都是瞬间动词。9 Stamps by people for sending letters.A. useB. usingC. usedD . are used 答案D, 析 这里是被动语态，意为邮票被人们用来发信。10 The radio s

358、ays Tianjin will be tomorrow.A. rainsB. rainC. rainedD . rainy 答案D, 析 rainy为形容词作表语。11 If you dont know this word, in the dictionary.A. look for itB. look at itC. look after itD . look it up 答案 D . 析 lookup查字典，与look有关的词组有：look about四周环视look after 照顾look around周围，四处看look at 看look back 回顾look for 寻找loo

359、k forward to 期待look out 当心look like看上去像12 My father told me play on the street.A. notB. to notC. not toD . did not 答案 C. 析 不定式的否定式是not to do something.13 There is going to an English party this evening.A. beB. hasC. haveD .is 答案 A. 析 这里是therebe无生命的“ 有“ 加助动词的句型，即there will be,而没有 there have的句型。14 The

360、re no bus stop here last year.A. isB. wasC. areD . were 答案 B. 析 last year为去年，所以用过去时。而 there b e 句型的单复数要看be动词之后离之最近的名词是单数还是复数。 如： There is a pen and two pencils onthe desk.15 Our school will hold a sports meeting if it tomorrow.A. isn*t rainB. rainsC. wont rainD . doesnt rain 答案 D . 析 在状语从句中应用一般时态来表示

361、将来。16 Bikes mustnt everywhere.A. be putB. be puttedC. putD . putting 答案 A. 析 这里是被动语态。与 put有关的词组如下：put away 放好 put off 推迟 put on 穿上 put out 扑灭 put down 放下17 Neither Li Lei nor Han Meimei Harbin.A. have been toB. has been toC. have gone toD . has gone to 答案 B. 析 has been to 是去过某处。18 Its cold today you

362、d better more coats.A. put onB. take offC. to put onD . to take off 答案 A. 析 *d better其后加不带to的不定式，而 put o n 为“ 穿上” 。19 Henry a birthday card for Sam yesterday.A. has boughtB. buysC. boughtD . will buy 答案 C. 析 因句中的yesterday为表达过去的时间状语，所以应用过去时态。20 When I got to the factory, the workers about the filim.A

363、. are talkingB. talkedC. were talkingD . have talked 答案 C. 析 状语从句中所用的动词为过去时，则主句中也要与之呼应。而工人们在谈论电影为一长时间的动作，所以要用过去进行时。A. takeB. bringC. carryD . catch 答案 A.22 I enjoy the light music.A. to listen toB. listening toC. hearingD . to hear 答案 B. 析 enjoy与 finish其后只能接动名词作宾语补足语。23 Please as soon as you get the

364、re.A. ring me upB. ring up meC. wake me upD . wake up me 答案A. 析ring up打电话，而wake up唤醒。英文中有很多动词词组如其宾语是代词时，一定要放在动词与介词之间。24 When I , I want to be a teacher.A. grows upB. grow upC. shall growD . grew up 答案B. 析 grow u p长大。而状语从句要用现在时表示将来，即使主句也用的是一般现在时，但它含有将来之意。25 I called him and he to have a talk with me.

365、A. stopB. stopsC. stopedD . stopped 答案D , 析 这是由and连接的两个并列句，所以时态应保持一致。26 - Would you please me an evaser, Lucy?- Certainly. Here you are.A. borrowB. lendC. borrowedD . lent 答案B. 析would you please其后接不带to的不定式即动词原形，而borrow为借入” 而lend为“ 借出27 Trees in spring.A. plantB. were plantedC. should be plantedD . s

366、hould plant 答案C. 析should用于一般现在时态中表示应该，而此句又是被动语态。28 - Wheres your father?- He to Paris.A. goB. goesC. wentD . has gone 答案Dm has gone是已去某处了，不在这里了。所以强调过去的动作影响到现在。29 - Must I finish my homework in class now?- No, you . You can do it at home.A. mustntB. may notC. needn*tD . can 答案 C. 析 neednt表示没有必要一定要这样做

367、。由must提问，肯定句用must,否定句用needn*t.30 Thank you very much for your book me.A. lending, toB. lent, toC. borrow, fromD . borrowing,from 答案A. 苏for是介词，要用动名词作介词宾语。31 The Great Green Wall will stop the wind from the earth away.A. blowingB. blowC. blowsD . to blow 答案 A. 析 stop-from doing something.阻止某人或某物作某事。32

368、 The students will go to the West Hill Farm by bike, if it finetomorrow.A. will beB.isC. shall beD . was 答案 B.33 Our teacher always tells us in the street. Ifs too dangerous.A. dont playB. not to playC. to playD . not play 答案 B. 析 不定式的否定式为not to do。34 English is a useful language. It widely in the w

369、orld.A. is spokenB. was spokenC. can speakD . will speak 答案 A. 析 本句为被动语态。35 The kite is flying high in the sky. It a bird.A. looks atB. looks likeC. looks forD . looks after 答案 B. 析 look like像. . .,其中like为介词。36 - Look! What*s Wang Ping doing over there?- She under a big tree.A. singsB.sangC. has sun

370、gD . is singing 答案 D .37 You see a doctor. Youve got a bad cold.A. willB. are going toC. had betterD . could 答案Q 析 had better最好，意为一种真心的劝告。38 Your radio is too loud. Would you please ?A. turn down itB. turn it downC. to turn down itD . to turn it down 答案 B. 析 would you please后面加动词原形。39 Could you tell

371、 me if it tomorrow?A. rainsB. is rainingC. will rainD . rain 答案 C. 析 if 从句是宾语从句，而不是状语从句。所以还是要用将来时，而不能用一般现在时表示将来。40 Suddenly one of the bags the truck and landed in the middle ofthe road.A. fell outB. fell downC. fell offD . will be 答案C. 析fall o ff掉落， 与off有关的词组有 see o ff送 行give o ff散 发shutoff 关闭 kick

372、 off 踢掉 turn off 关闭 get off 下车 jump off 跳下 show of 炫耀take o ff脱 下pay o ff付清41 He at this school since two years ago.A. wasB. has beenC. isD . will be 答案B. 析since引导的时间状语应与完成时相呼应。42 She doesnt know .A. when to doB. what to doC. how to doD . where to do 答案B. 析when, how, where均为疑问副词，而what为疑问代词，又因d o是及物动

373、词需要宾语。如用疑问副词时应为when to do it, how to do it, where to do it.43 Must older people to politely.A.speakB. spokenC. be spokeD . be spoken 答案D . 析这句话的主动语态应为 People must speak politely to older people 对年龄较大的人讲话应有礼貌。44 Teachers usually ask their students loudly in class.A. to speakB.speakC.speaksD . spoke 答

374、案A. 析ask somebody to do something 要求某人作某事。45 - Where is Mr Zhang?- Look! He on a big machine over there.A. worksB. workedC. is workingD . has worked 答案 C. 析 由look, liston等词开始的句子一般要用现在进行时态。46 Theres a football match. Please the TV at once. Lets watch together.A. turn onB. take offC. turn offD . go on

375、 答案 A. 析 turn o n 打开。与turn有关的词组有： turn against背 叛 turn o n 打开 turn + 颜色 变为某种颜色turn o ff关 闭 turn over翻 转 turn to 翻到某页turn into 变 为 turnup 向上翻47 Please tell me where have our picnic tomorrow.A. we willB. will weC. willD . will you 答案A. 苏 where引导的从句是宾语从句，而不是状语从句。48 We English for three years already. A

376、nd we can speak a littleEnglish now.A. learnB. have learnedC. has learnedD . will learn 答案 B. 析 for+表示一段长度的时间词，应与完成时相呼应。49 At last, Lin Feng made the baby and begin to laugh.A. stop to cryB. stop cryingC. to stop to cryD . to stop crying 答案 B. 析 make somebody do (or doing) something, stop doing 意为停止

377、做某事。50 Our classroom must clean every day.A. keepB. to keepC. be keptD . to be kept 答案 C. 析 应为被动语态。51 I hear there a sports meeting in our school next week.A. is going to haveB. will haveC. is going to beD . are going to be 答案 C. 析这是hear的宾语从句是there b e 句型。 而且是用了 be going to形式。52 Its getting colder,

378、Peter. Youd better this coat with you.A. bringB. carryC. takeD . get 答案 C. 析 bring带来，take带走。53 Our classroom is clean and tidy. It every day.A. cleansB. is cleaningC. cleanedD . is cleaned 答案Dm 这里表达的是经常的一种状态，所以应用一般现在时的被动语态。54 If you are not careful in the street, a car may you.A. hurtB. hitC. runD .

379、 catch 答案 B. 析 hit撞上，碰上，击中55 The farmers were busy ready for the next year.A. gotB. gettingC. to getD . get 答案 B. 析 be busy后应用动词的ing形式。第二篇句法一、 主 要 句 式（ -）知识概要初中所学的句型一般要分为陈述句、疑问句、祈使句和感叹句。 陈述句中有肯定句与否定句之分。其中可以分为以下五种： 主语+ 不及物动词。如：I arrived at six last night. 主语+ 及物动词+ 宾语，如：I bought a good EnglishChinese

380、 D ictionary yesterday. 主语+ 及物动词+ 间接宾语+ 直接宾语，如：Please tell me a story before I go to bed.这样可加双宾语的句子有 buy,tell, give,ask, pass, teach. 主语+ 及物动词+ 宾语+ 宾语补足语， 如： I found it impossible todo it. Please keep the classroom clean and tidy. 主语+ 系动词+ 表语，如：Tomisan American boy. The grass turned green in spring.

381、在初中常见的句型中有 Therebe句型，表示存在某种事物，如： There is a map on the wall 其be动词的形式要与其后面相近的那个名词相一致。要注意的是这种句型加入助动词后，也要保持 be 动词， 不要换用 have,如： There is going to be a meeting tomorrow.在句子结构中要注意主谓一致的问题，即句子的主语与谓语动词要相呼应。要注意的有如下几点： 用 and连接两个主语时一般应视为复数， 但如一人身兼两职时则要用单数谓语动词形式，如：A singer and dancer is coming to our party, asi

382、nger and dancer既歌唱又可舞的演员。而 a singer and a dancer则要译为：一位歌唱家和一位舞蹈家。 有些以s 结尾的名词谓语动词要用单数，如： Thenews is good （ news为不可数名词） 。 有量词时应按量词的数量计算; 如：Thispair of glasses is good My glasses are broken.有些形单却意为复数的名词，如： People are coming here 这样的词还有P o lic e ,如果要讲一个警察时，应讲 a policemano 两个警察为 two policemeno 又如 a polic

383、ewoman, twopolicewomen 所有不定代词 each, either, neither, one, the other,nobody, nothing, anyone, anything, someone, something 要作为单数如：Someone is waiting for you 在并列句中表示联合关系的连词有：andnot only but also, neither nor, either or 如： My sister and myparents are going to the cinemao 表示转折关系的并列连词有：but和 y e t,如：She i

384、s a good student, but she didnt pass the final exam. 又如： I think the news isstrange, yet it is true 表示选择关系的连词有：or, either o r ,如： Hurryup, or you will be late for school 表示因果关系的并列连词有： for, s o 如：They studied very hard, so they all passed the exam 在初中范围复合句中主要有状语从句和宾语从句（ 名词性从句） 两种， 而定语从句（ 形容词性从句） 要在高中

385、讲述，为了使同学阅读文章方便，我们将在下面另一章予以介绍。我们首先来看宾语从句。 在及物动词的后面可以接一个名词来充当宾语， 如：I knewthe m an,而这时也可以用一个句子来充当宾语，如： I knew that he was a goodman 这时宾语从句的连接词有that, (that只在从句中起联接作用， 不在句中充当语法成分，既不是主语也不是宾语，所以在口语中常常被省略。如： 1amsure (that) she has passed the exam if, whether它们在宾语从句中只起连接作用， 不起语法作用， 当作是否讲。 从句中有or n o t结构时， 要

386、用 whether,如：I ask him if (whether) he has had his lunch I asks him whether he has had hislunch or not what它在宾语从句中除了作连接词外，还要作主语或宾语成份，如： I don*t understand what you said (what 作 said 的宾语) 。 又如：I asked him what made him sick (what在宾语从句中作主语) 。 w ho,它也和what一样，在句中除作连接词外，可以充当句中的成份，如： I know who she islooki

387、ng for? whose 如 I ： I want to know whose book this is? which 如：D o you know which book is m in e?在连接词中还有4 个常用的连接副词，how 它的应用最广， 如：how much, how many, how long, how soon, how old 。如：How much does it cost? when 它只是连接时间状语， 如：Please tell mewhen the meeting will begin? where 它连接地点状语，如： Where are youfrom?

388、(4) w hy它要连接的是原因状语从句，如： The teacher asked why Tomdidn*t come to school.在考试中常见到的考点是： 宾语从句的时态与主句时态的呼应问题。 主句谓语动词如果是现在时或将来时，宾语从句的时态可以是任何所需要的时态， 如： I know he didn*t come.我知道他没来。 I know hewill come tomorrow 我矢口道他明天来。I know he has gone to London 我 矢 口道他已去伦敦了。 主句中的谓语动词若是过去时，宾语从句也要用过去时态中的某一种。比如： 一般过去时， 过去进行时

389、， 过去将来时， 过去完成时。除了在表达宇宙中的客观真理时， 不能用现在时态。 如：I wanted to know whenhe would come The teacher told me the earth moves around the sun 状语从句主要有时间状语从句，其连接词有： after, before, when, as, as soon as,until (till), while, since, by 其中较难掌握的有以下几点： until (till)直到， 在 用 until表达时间状语的句子中， 主句中的动词是要十分小心去选择。如动词是持续性动词， 它要用肯定句

390、， 如：I studied hard until 12 oclock last night.如果动词是瞬间截止性动词，则要用否定句，如： He didnt go to bed until hismother came back 由 since, for, by, before 来引导的时间状语从句。 since引导的时间状语是动作的开始时间，如： I have studied Englishsince 1 9 9 0 而 由 b y 引导的时间状语通常是动作的结束时间， 如：I hadlearned 25 English songs by the end of last term 而 befo

391、re 则多用于完成时，ago 贝 ij 多用于一般过去时，如： He had finished his work before twelve yesterdayI left my hometown two years ago 在状语从句中用一般现在时或一般过去时表示将来。它们可能是主句用一般将来时，从句用一般现在时，如： Ifit rains, they wonrt go to the park on Sunday 也可以主句是一般过去时， 从句用一般过去进行时, 如： He said if it rained the next day he would not go to thepark 考

392、试中常见的考点有：要学生区别是条件、时间状语从句还是宾语从句，因在宾语从句中该用什么时态用什么时态，如：I want to know if he willcome here tomorrow 在宾语从句中的条件状语从句与主句的关系， 如：I wantto know if it rains he will come here tomoirow 在原因状语从句中主要是b e c a u s e ,应译为“ 因为 。它表达的因果关系最强，如：He didnt pass the exambecause he didn*t study hard since 应译为“ 既然 ，如：Since you we

393、re illyesterday I left some notes on your desk (3 ) as 应译为“ 由于 ， 如：A s it istoo hot wefd better go swimming since 与 as 所表达的因果关系远比 because弱得多。而fo r表达的因果关系最弱。它不能用于句首，如：He studies hard,for he wants to go to college 在比较状语从句中有同级比较as a s ,如：This book is as good as that one 要注意的有两点： a s a s中间要用原级而不是比较级。 用形

394、容词还是副词，如：Mary writes as carefully as Tom而其否定句为 not as (so) a s ,如：They didnt work so hard as we d id ,而不同级比较用比较级加th a n ,如：He is younger than I am 要注意的是表示”越来越” 这一概念时有两个句型： 比会级+ a n d +比较级， 如：The days aregetting longer and longer The little girl is becoming more and more beautiful 定冠词the +比较级+ the +比

395、较级，如：The harder you study, themore you can learn 方式状语中要注意的是as ( 连词) 与like ( 介词) 的区别。a s作为连词其后接从句， 如：Please do it as I did it 但后面的句子常作省略，如：Please do it as I 而lik e是介词，其后要接的是宾语，如：Please do itlike me 结果和目的状语从句主要有so that, so that, in order that等几种用法。so - t h a t用在单数可数名词前，so +形容词+ a +名词 + th a t,如 :She i

396、s so beautiful a girl that everyone likes her 或用 such +a + 形容词 + 名词 + th a t,如：She is such a beautiful girl that everyonelikes her 在不可数名词或可数名词复数前只能用s u c h ,如：It is suchgood weather we want to go for a picnic 又如： They are such good players thatthey should win the game. (3 ) 在 much, many, few, little

397、 之前只能用 so,如：I have so little money that I cant buy it so that 之间只有形容词时，则不能用 such, 如：It is so good that I want to buy so that 其后接从句，如： I got up earlier so that I could catch the first bus( 二 ) 正 误辨析 误 The stories in that book was written many years ago 正 The stories in that book were written many yea

398、rs ago. 析 作主语的名词、代词或不定式、动名词，它们往往要带有修饰词，这些词可能是形容词，也可能是短语，但谓语动词还是要取决于这个主语的数，要记住的是一个名词不可能在同一句中作两个不同的语法成份，如：b o o k作了o f的介词宾语则不可能再作主语了。 误 To read many books are good for you 正 To read many books is good for you 析 不定式作主语应该看作单数主语。 误 What he said are right 正 What he said is right 析 从句作主语一定要按单数主语看待。 正 The r

399、ich is not always happy 误 The rich are not always happy 析形容词+定冠词表示一类人， 谓语动词应用复数， 如：The young are veryinterested in study and sports 误 The school master and writer are coming 正 The school master and writer is coming 析 本句应译为：校长兼作家就要来了。而 The school master and the writerare coming 则要译为：校长和一个作家要来了。 在英语表达

400、法中确实有Thegirl and boy are playing on the grass 这应译为： 一个女孩， 一个男孩在操场上玩。因为余可能这样两个概念作用在一个人身上。又如： the husband and wife夫妻二人。 误 You or she go to get some water for us 正 You or she goes to get some water for us 析 由 o r 连接的两个主语应以离谓语动词近的那一个计算其数。 这样的用法还有 either or, neither nor, not only but also 也有人称作” 就近原则” 。

401、误 The teacher with a lot of students come into the classroom 正 The teacher with a lot of students comes into the classroom 析 真正的主语是the teach er,而 w ith短语是伴随状态，不影响主语的数。 误 My glasses is broken 正 My glasses are broken 误 This pair of glasses are good 正 This pair of glasses is good 误 These kinds of butte

402、r is good. 正 These kinds of butter are good 析 英语中有些名词只有复数形式，如： glasses眼镜， shorts短裤等。如没有量词在前时，要用复数谓语动词，但有了量词之后则要按量词的单复数计算。 误 One of the boys are going to take part in the match 正 One of the boys is going to take part in the match 析 One o f 结构应以one来计算主语的数。 误 Half of the work are done 正 Half of the wor

403、k is done 误 Half of the books is read 正 Half of the books are read 析 在小于1 的数量词作主语时，如： 2 3 , 8 0 %, 0 . 3 5 - + of十名词，这时主语的数应按o f 后面的名词计算。如果名词是不可数名词或可数名词单数，则谓语动词要用单数，如名词是复数则要用复数谓语动词。 误 Each sides are full of trees 正 Each side is full of trees 误 Both side is full of trees 正 Both sides are full of tree

404、s 析 each, either其后都要加单数名词，而 both后要加复数名词。 如：each, either, another, little, a little, much 等作主语时，谓语动词全部要用单数形式。 误 The boys each has an apple 正 The boys each have an apple 析 each而同位语时，不影响句子的主语。 误 Everyone of us has a ticket for the concert 正 Every one of us has a ticket for the concert 析 everyone, someo

405、ne, everybody 在作主语时都不能加o f 结构。 误 Girls like dancing very much, but few likes playing football 正 Girls like dancing very much, but few like playing football 析 few 虽然含意上是“ 几乎没有“ ，但作主语时仍要当作复数。 误 The number of the workers in that factory are two hundred 正 The number of the workers in that factory is two

406、 hundred 析 the number of 意为：某某的数字是. . . 如： the number of students 学生人数，the number of players运动员人数。 不论数字如何都应看作单数。 而 anumber o f 与 many意思相同，其后加可数名词复数，谓语动词用复数形式。如： A number of students are playing on the grass 误 The rest of the students is here 正 The rest of the students are here 误 The rest of the work

407、 are done 正 The rest of the work is done 析 the rest o f 的用法与2 / 3 , 一半，8 0 % + o f 的结构一致， o f 后面为可数名词复数时用复数谓语动词，为不可数名词或可数名词单数时用单数谓语动词。这样用法还有lots of, a lot of, plenty ofo 误 The news in todays newspaper are not bad 正 The news in todays newspaper is not bad 析 有些以s 结尾的名词要用作不可数名词，它们是：news, physics,mathem

408、atics, thanks, 误 The Chinese is kind and friendly 正 The Chinese are kind and friendly 析Chinese作为中文来讲是单数名词， 但作为中国人讲是单复同形的名词。如： one Chinese, two Chinese 而 The Chinese = The people of China 要用复数谓语动词。 误 This dictionary is too expensive fbr me Ten dollars are a big sum for me 正 This dictionary is too exp

409、ensive fbr me Ten dollars is a big sum for me 析 表示一段时间，一笔金钱，一段距离，都应看作单数名词。 误 Who are going to take part in our football match? 正 Who is going to take part in our football match? 析 用 Who提问时，习惯上用单数谓语动词，但 which则要视其情况而定, 如： which are better these shoeses or those shoes? 又如： which is better thisone or th

410、at one? 误 What a hot weather it is! 误 How hot the weather it is! 正 What hot weather it is! 正 How hot the weather is! 析 感叹句是用来表达说话人的喜怒哀乐的感情。它 由 what与 how 作句子的开始，判定是用what还是用how 的最好办法是将它们换为陈述句，比如： What the hot weather it is!应转换为： It is the hot weather 那么句子的起点是单词i t o 再来看感叹句中i t 前有不可数名词w eath er,则只能用wha

411、to 再看第二句 How hot the weather is!转为陈述句时为: The weather is hot这时句子的开始单词为the w eather,再来看感叹句在the weather前只有形容词， 所以应用how0至于是用what a 还 是 what要看名词的具体情况而定，单数可数名词加what a 其余的加用whato 误 We have to sing this, have we? 误 We have to sing this, havent we? 正 We have to sing this, don*t we? 析 在反意疑问句中除了标准的一些常规外，有一些例外：

412、Lets go home, shall we?Let us go home, will you?She had to leave, didnft she?D o your homework at once, will you?There is not much good news in todays newspaper, is there?Neither of them are right, are they?I think he will come to the party wont he?think后的宾语从句，与其他宾语从句不一样，在初中只有这样一个较特殊的词。这样的句子的反意疑问句的主

413、语要用宾语从句中的主语，其助动词要用宾语从句的助动词， 而肯定还是否定要看主句谓语动词而定， 如： I don*t think heis coming to our party, is he? 误 I want to know where does he live 正 I want to know where he lives 析 宾语从句中一律要用陈述语序，而不用疑问语序。 误 - 1 havent got a ticket for the football match- Nor I have 正 - 1 havent got a ticket fbr the football match-

414、 Nor (Neither) have I 析 nor, neither用在简答否定句中时要采用倒装语序。在肯定句的简答句中则要用 so, 如： I do my homework very quickly, So does Mary 误 Look! Here the bus comes! 正 Look! Here comes the bus! 误 Look! Here comes he! 正 Look! Here he comes 析 在 there, here打头的句子中，如果主语是名词，则要采用倒装语序；如果是人称代词则用一般语序。 误 D o you want Mary to go to

415、 the cinema with us?No, I don*t hope so 正 D o you want Mary to go to the cinema with us?No, I hope not 析 我不这样想，可 用 I dont think so 但 hope的否定简答句只能用Ihope not 这是习惯用法。 但这两个词的肯定简答句形是一样的，如： I thinkso. I hope so 误 That is difficult for us to learn English well 正 It is difficult for us to learn English well

416、 析 I I t 这里的语法作用是形式主语，而真正的主语是后面的不定式。形式主语和形式宾语都要用i t 而不能用t h a t ,如： I think it difficult to learnEnglish well i t 在这句中是think的形式宾语。(三 )例题解析1 There a pencil box on the desk.A .is B. are C. has D . have 答案 A. 析There b e 句形中的b e 动词要看其后面离它最近的名词而定， 如：Thereare two books and a pencil on the desk 但 去 I可以讲 Th

417、ere is a pencil and twobooks on the desk2 Could you tell me ?A Mrs King where lives B where does Mrs King liveC where Mrs King lives D Mrs King lives where 答案 C. 析 宾语从句中的疑问句要用陈述语序。3 Your brother came to see you, ?A does he B doesnt he C did he D didnt he 答案D. 需 前句是肯定句，后面反意疑问句要用否定句，同时came为过去时态，所以应用di

418、dnt he4 Its getting cloudy, ?A does it B doesnt it C is it D isnt it 答案 D . 析 要区分s 是 has还 是 i s , 这里由getting得出s 是 is。5 keep me waiting so long.A Not B Wont C D on*t D Not to 答案 C. 析 D ont +动词原形为祈始句的否定句。6 Mr Green hasnt been to Beijing, ?A has he B hasnt he C did he D didnt he 答案A. 行 此 句 h as是助动词与过去分

419、词构成现在完成时态。7 You have your lunch at school, ?A have you B havent you C do you D don*t you 答案 D . 析 这里的have是实意动词“ 吃” ，而不是助动词。8 sunny day! Lets go out for a walk.A How a B How C What a D What 答案 C. 析 这个感叹句是个省略句，其真实的句子应为What a sunny day it is!9 - Can you tell me ? - Sure Shes a nurseA where is your sist

420、er B where your sister isC what is your sister D what your sister is 答案 D . 析 who 问的是姓名，如： Who is he? He is Smith 或 He is my fatherWhat 问的是职业，如： What is he? He is a teacher10 John likes listening to the radio, ?A does he B doesnt he C doesnt John D does Johe 答案 B. 析 当名词作主语时，反意疑问句应用代词。11 Neither you

421、nor I on the team.A are B were C am D is 答案 c. 京 由 neith6r n o r 作连接词作主语时，其谓语动词要与相临近的那个主语相呼应。12 delicious food! Id like some more.A what a B How a C What D How 答案 C. 析 因 food为不可数名词。13 there a cat under the chair?A Are B Is C Has D Have 答案 B. 析 这 是 there b e 句型的疑问句。14 Could you tell me ?A when the tr

422、ain will arrive B when the train arrivedC when did the train arrive D when does the train arrives 答案 A. 析 could用于现在时疑问句表达了 口气的委婉，并不是过去时态。且宾语从句要用陈述语句。15 - bad weather!- Yes, But its going to be fine soon, I thinkA How B What a C What an D What 答案D. 析 weather为不可数名词。16 - Could you tell me ?- Yes, They

423、to the libraryA where are the twins， have beenB where were the twins, have beenC where the twins are, have goneD where the twins were, have gone 答案 c. 析 have been t o 是去过什么地方，而现在回来了。 have gone to 是到某地去了，人现在不在这里。17 Go and the TV quickly The volleyball match will begin rightaway.A turn off B turn down

424、 C turn up D turn on 答案 D . 析 这是个祈使句，它 由 and连接两个动词。注意词组搭配的不同含义。18 Lets go for some tea, ?A shall we B will we C do we D dont we 答案 A. 析 Lets g o ， shall we? Let us g o ， will you?这是两个特殊的反意疑问句。19 Joans short, ?A wasnt she B hasnt she C isnt she D doesnt she 答案 C. 析 在此句中应视s为 i s , 而不是has或 was(,20 I do

425、nt know to read the word.A which B what C whose D how 答案 D . 析因不定式to read中的read是及物动词， 已有自己的宾语the w ord,所以应用疑问副词howo21 He didnrt go to school, he was ill.A for B but C and D so 答案A. 加 这里是表示因果的关系，从句表示原因，所以用fo r,放于句尾，且常常前面有一个逗号。s o 引起的是结果状语从句，如： He was only twelve, sohe couldnt join the army22 The youn

426、g woman can hardly ride a bike, she?A doesnt B does C cant D can 答案 D . 析 hardly为否定词，所以应视此句为否定句。其后的反意疑问句应用肯定句。23 Tom never goes to the cinema on Sundays, ?A does he B doesnt he C isn*t he D is he 答案A. 析 never也是否定词，所以应将句子看作否定句。24 Mother said to him, D ont on football. ” 答案 A.25 Mr White, together wit

427、h some Japanese friends, visit our schoolthis afternoon.A are going to B is going to C have D has 答案 B. 析 句子的主语是Mr W h ite,而together w ith 是伴随状况，不影响句子的主语。26 There is little water in the glass, ?A is it B is there C isnt it D isnt there 答案 B. 析 这 是 there b e 句型的反意疑问句。27 Ampere was thinking about a ma

428、ths problem, ?A didnt he B wasnt he C did he D is he 答案 B. 析 这是进行时态的反意疑问句。A wasnt B didnt C hasnt D isnt 答案 B. 析 had这里是实意动词而不是助动词。29 Well make for you in the front of the car.A a room B room C rooms D some rooms 答案 B. 析 room 此处为不可数名词，意为“ 地方，空间” 。30 Neither she nor I to the Great wall before.A has go

429、ne B have gone C have been D has been 答案 c. 析 由ne汕e r nor连接两个主语时， 其谓语动词应与相临近的那个主语相呼应。31 Help me collect these books, ?A are you B will you C do you D shall you 答案 B. 析 祈使句的反意疑问句应用will y o u ,而 Lets g o 例外，其反意疑问句为 shall we?32 The number of deer, mountain lions and wild roseschange much if people leav

430、e things as they are.A dont B doesnt C isnt D didnt 答案 B. 析 the number o f 为” 的数量、数目 ，所以谓语动词用单数形式。而 anumberof要加复数名词，其谓语动词也用复数。33 She*s had breakfast, ?A is she B isnt she C hasnt she D has she 答案 C. 析 这里的s应视为has34 I wonder .A whose bicycle is it B it is whose bicycleC is it whose bicycle D whose bic

431、ycle it is 答案 D . 析 wonder后的宾语从句应用陈述语序。35 It is good for us morning exercises.A do B to do C did D done 答案B. 析 这里的i t 是形式主语，而真正的主语是不定式to d o 36 Peter has sports very often, ?A does, Peter B doesnt he C doesnt Peter D does he 答案 B. 析has这里是实意动词， 而主语为名词时其反意疑问句中的主语要用代词。37 Mr Black said, Jenny, dont be l

432、ate tomorrow ”Mr Black told Jenny .A dont be late tomorrow B didnt be late tomorrowC not be late next morning D not to be late the next day 答案D. 析 tell 一般要加双宾语，其间接宾语是J e n n y ,直接宾语是不定式。而这里用的是不定式的否定形式。38 Li Mei read the newspaper to the granny, ?A does she B didnt she C did she D wasnt she 答案B. 析rea

433、d这里是过去时态，因其主语是第三人称单数，而read并 未 加s所以是过去时态。（ read的过去时与过去分词都是read ,只不过读音不同）二、 定 语 从 句（ 一） 知识概要定语从句并不属于中考范围，但由于作者在多年的教学中体会到，这一语法现象影响了许多学生自学英语 这些学生一般是成绩较好的学生，想进行大量阅读来提高自己的英语水平，但总是碰到一些问题，百思不得其解。苦于自己的水平只限于初中水平，无法提高，但各种补习班又都是为一些水平较差的学生开设的，所以又投师无门。为了解决这部分学生的学习困难，也为那些有志青年铺平学习上的道路，特用这一节讲述定语从句，不是从语法上讲述，而是从阅读理解方面

434、去讲述。可供同学们在学习时参考。这会对你的英语学习起到事半功倍的作用。 对于形容词我们已十分熟悉了，如：a good b o o k ,形容词good用来修饰书booko我们也可以用一个句子来修饰名词， 这种句子叫做形容词性从句，它起修饰名词的作用，又被叫做定语从句（ The attributive clause）。但有一点不同的是这个从句攵是像形容词那样放于名词前, 而是放在名词之后。它所修饰的名词又被叫作先行词， 如：D o you know the scientist who gave us thetalk this afternoon?这句中的主句是 D o you know the

435、scientist?（ 你知道那位科学家吗? ） 而who gave us the talk this afternoon （ 他今天下午给我们作的报告。）是定语从句。所以这两句话合为一体即是：你认识今天下午给我们作报告的那位科学家吗? 这里scientist叫作先行词， 而w ho叫作定语从句的引导词。who在定语从句中起主语的作用，w ho的数与它的先行词相同。又如：You mustdo everything that I do 这里先行词是 everything, 而 that I do 是定语从句，此句应译为：你必须作我所作的一切。that叫作定语从句的引导词，在句中作d o的宾语。

436、引导定语从句的引导词有关系代词：that, which, who, whom,whose和关系副词when, where, why, how。不论关系代词还是关系副词，都应放于先行词和定语从句之间，起联系作用，但它们都要在定语从句中起语法作用，充当一个成份。如关系代词在定语从句中不是作主语便是作宾语，而关系副词则是作状语。我们先来看关系代词的用法。that的先行词可以是人也可以是物。如：A plane is a machine that can fly 这里先行词是machine而 that是关系代词， 在定语从句中作主语。 这句译为： 飞机是一种会飞的机器。又如： I like the bo

437、ok (that) you lent me yesterday 这里先行词是 book, 关系代词用t h a t ,它在定语从句中作lend ( 借) 的宾语。要注意的是关系代词在定语从句中作宾语时可以省略，即： I like the book you lent me yesterday which关系代词的先行词只能是物。它在定语从句中作主语或宾语，如： Thebook shop is a shop which sells books 这里 shop 是先行词，which 在从句中作主语。又如： The book (which) I read last night was wonderfu

438、l 这里主句是The book was wonderful 而定语从句是修饰主句的主语b o o k ,即我昨晚读的那本书, which在定语从句中作read的宾语， 可以省略。 who, whom,whose w ho在定语从句中作主语， whom是 w ho的宾格，在定语从句中作宾语， 而 whose则是形容词性物主代词， 在从句中作定语， 如： The man whovisited our school yesterday is an American friend 昨天参观我们学校的人是一位美国朋友。W ho在定语从句中作主语。 又如：Who*s that woman (whom) y

439、oujust talked to ? 你刚才与之谈话的那个女人是谁? 而whom作定语从句中介词t o 的宾语， 可以省略， 而在现代英语中， 句首的whom也常常可用who代替。This is our classmate, Mary, whose home is not far from our school 这是我们的同学玛丽，她的家离我们学校不远。 为了便于理解，我们来看看是如何将两句话并为一句话的。1 . I saw the man. He closed the doorI saw the man who (that) closed the door2. The girl is hap

440、py She won the raceThe girl who won the race is happy3. The students are from China They sit in the front rowThe students who sit in the front row are from China( 要注意的是先行词是students则 w ho的数也应看作复数。)4. We are studying sentences They contain adjective dauseWe are studying sentences that (which) contain

441、adjective dause5 . The taxi driver was friendly He took me to the airportThe taxi driver who took me to the airport was friendly6. The book was good I read itThe book that I read was goodThe book I read was good7. The people were very nice We visited them yesterdayThe people we visited yesterday wer

442、e very nice8. The man called the police His wallet was stolenThe man whose wallet was stolen called the police9. I come from a country Its history goes back thousands of yearsI come from a country whose history goes back thousands of years10. I have to call the man I picked up his umbrella after the

443、 meetingI have to call the man whose umbrella I picked up after the meeting关系代词whom, which在定语从句中作介词宾语时， 可以和介词一起放于先行词与定语从句之间，有时为了关系紧凑也可以将whom与 which与先行词紧挨着书写，而将介词置于定语从句的后面，如：That was the room in which we had lived for ten years 或可 以写作：That was the room which we had lived in fbr ten yearsHe was the ma

444、n whom(who) you were looking for 要注意的是此句的关系代词whom可以用主格取代， 而 look fo r是短语动词也不可将fo r放于定语从句之前。that作关系代词作介词宾语时，不能紧跟介词，而只能将介词置于定语从句的后面。 如： The man that we were talking about has come to our school 这时不可用about that 请看下面例句：1. The meeting was interesting I went to itThe meeting that I went to was interesting

445、2. The man was very kind I talked to him yesterdayThe man who I talked to yesterday was very kind3. I must thank the people I got a present from himI must thank the people who I got a present from4. The picture was beautiful She was looking at itThe picture that (which) she was looking at was beauti

446、ful5 . The man is standing over there I told you about himThe man who I told you about is standing over there除关系代词外，还有关系副词， when, where, w h y ,其 中 when用来指时间， 在定语从句中作时间状语。 如：I never forget the day when I first came to theGreat Wall 而 where 则指地点， 如：This is the house where the old man lives请看下面例句：1. T

447、he city was beautiful We spent our vacation thereThe city where we spent our vacation was beautiful2. That is the restaurant I will meet you thereThat is the restaurant where I will meet you3. The town is small I grew up thereThe town where I grew up is small4. That is the drawer I keep my newpapers

448、 thereThat is the drawer where I keep my newspapers5 . Monday is the day We will come thenMonday is the day When we will came7. 1 9 6 0 is the year The revolution took place then1 9 6 0 is the year when the revolution took place8. July is the month The weather is usually the hottest thenJuly is the

449、month when the weather is usually the hottest在定语从句中又可分为两大类定语从句，即限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。 限制性定语从句是先行词在意义上不可缺少的定语，如果去掉的话，主句的意思就不完整，意义就表述不明。这种句型一般定语从句紧接先行词，如：I was the only person in my office who was invited非限制性定语从句。它与主句的关系不十分密切，只是对其附加说明，也就是讲即便去掉定语从句，句意也不受影响，仍然清晰明了。这样的定语从句要在它和主句之间加一逗号分开。且关系代词不引导这种非限制性定语从句，如：

450、 Abraham Lincoln, who led the United States through these years, was shoton April 1 4 , 1 8 6 5 at a theatre in Washington D . C . 又如：Galileo lived in the city of Pisa, where there is a leaning tower about 180 feet high（ 二） 正误辨析 误 I wont tell you the name of the person who teach me English 正 I wont

451、tell you the name of the person who teaches me English 误 We talked about the things and the people who we met during the SecondWorld War 正 We talked about the things and the people that we met during the SecondWorld War 析这里的关系代词不要用w h o ,因为其先行词有两个一个是things （ 物） ,而另一个是people （ 人） ，这时既不可用w h o ,又不可用w

452、h ic h ,因前者只能用于先行词是人的情况下，而后者则用于先行词是物的情况下，所以只能用t h a t ,因为它的先行词既可以是人又可以是物。 误 The book, that I bought yesterday, was very good 正 The book, which I bought yesterday, was very good 析 先行词与定语从句被逗号分割开来时，即作为非限制性定语从句。 在非限制性定语从句中 which, when, who, whom, where, when, whose 等都可以和限制性定语从句中的作用一样, 而独有that不易用于非限制性定语

453、从句。 误 The dictionary which I lent it yesterday is a very useful tool 正 The dictionary which I lent yesterday is a very useful tool 析 关系代词在定语从句中是要起语法作用的，它不是作主语就是作宾语。虽然在作宾语时它的位置由原来的宾语位置移到了句首， 但它的作用依然存在，而且在原宾语位置上不能再出现宾语。 误 The teacher I want to learn English from is the one which comes fromAmerica 正 Th

454、e teacher I want to learn English from is the one who comes from America 析 the one, anyone, those作代词并且是指某人、物时，其关系代词不能 用 which应 用 whoo 误 This is the room in that the old man lives 正 This is the room in which the old man lives 正 This is the room which the old man lives in 正 This is the room that the o

455、ld man lives in 析 that不能紧跟在介词后作介词宾语， 但如果介词不前置仍放于句尾， 则可 用 that作引导词, 而且可以省略。如： This is the room the old man lives in 误 I can do everything which is good for you 正 I can do everything that is good for you 析 在先行词是 all, much, little, something, everything, anything,nothing, none, the one等不定代词时， 虽然它们指的是物体

456、， 但不要用which而 用 that作定语从句的引导词。 误 The only thing which the students can do is studying hard 正 The only thing that the students can do is studying hard 析 在先行词前有 only, any, few, little, no, all, one of 等词修饰时，虽然先行词指的是物，也不要用which作关系代词，而要用thato 误 This is the first American film which Fve ever seen 正 This i

457、s the first American film that Ive ever seen 析在先行词是序数词， 或由序数词修饰时， 其关系代词不可用which 这样的用法还有在形容词最高级修饰的先行词之后， 如：This is the best book thatI have ever seen 误 He is from Africa, that we can see from the colour of the skin 正 He is from Africa, as we can see from the colour of the skin 析 当 a s 或 which引导非限制性定语

458、从句时， 它可能没有明确的先行词，它们所指代的是前面整个句子。如例题应译为他是从非洲来这个事情是可以从其肤色上看出的。三、 常见习惯用语( - ) 知识概要由于英语国家的语言习惯与中国的语言习惯有许多不同之处，所以造成了许多同学在做选择或书写， 或与人交谈中造成误用中国方式来对英语的问句作解答。例如一个小女孩十分好看， 可爱， 外国人见到时会讲：You are so beautiful 这时的答语应该是Thank you 如果外国人发现你的英语不错， 他们会讲：YourEnglish is very good 这时中国人常常会说：不，我说的不好。这纯是一种礼貌的答语，但是不符合英语习惯。它正确

459、的答语应是Thank you 虽然交际英语有一些规律可讲，但更重要的是学习外国的生活习惯，了解他们的文化背景，历史渊源，这样才能真正的学好一门外语。（ 二）正误辨析 误- What can I do for you?- Yes, please help me 正- What can I do for you?- Fd like to buy a sweater 析What can I do for you?这一问语实际上用于的情景很多，要根据具体情况而定。如在商店中售货员讲这句话应译为： 您想要点什么? 在其他场合也可以被译为：我能为您做些什么? 它的答语应是直接讲出想让对方提供的帮助。 误-

460、 Which colour do you like?- Sorry, I dont like 正- Which colour do you like?- 1 prefer blue 析 由which来提问的问句是要回答具体的选择，而不能泛指，泛泛的回答。如 Yes, I like it 误 D o you like to come with us tonight? 正 Would you like to come with us tonight? 析D o you like 问的是对方的习惯，如：D o you like swimming? D o youlike collecting sta

461、mps?而would you like 则是一次性的邀请、提议。邀请的英语表达法还有如下几种：Shall we go?我们走吧！Lefs go?让我们走吧！How about having a cup of tea?喝杯茶如何？What about a cup of coffee 喝杯咖啡如何？Why not buy it?为什么不买呢？其肯定答语一般为 Certainly, Yes, 0. K. All right, With pleasure 误 Sorry, Ive kept you waitingNot at all 正 Sorry, Fve kept you waitingNever

462、 mind 析 ” 介意不介意” 这一问法与答语在中英文中有所不同。如：- D o you mind my smoking here? -A . Yes, do it pleaseB . No, of course notC . Yes, take it pleaseD . No, you cant take it这时正确的选择应是B。 其意为：不介意，当然不。而 A 选项则自相矛盾了，它应译为：是的我介意，请抽吧。而 D选项是：不介意，你不能抽。当向对方争求意见时，可以有以下问法：D o you mind if I open the door?Would you mind mailing t

463、he letter for me其答语如果是同意应为： Certainly not, not at all而不同意时应为Y e s ,或 Im sorry 误 Whats that man?He is Mike 正 Whats that man?He is a teacher 正 Whos that man?He is Mike (He is Mikes father ) 析 由 what提问是问的职业，由 w ho提问问的是姓名或身份。 误 - How much are they?- Half a kilo, please 正 - How many bananas do you want?-

464、 Half a kilo Please 析 How much are they?问的是价格而不是实际物品的多少。 误 Fm sorry, but is this the way to the park? 正 Excuse me, but is this the way to the park? 析 rm sorry是对已经做错了的事向对方道歉时的开始语。而 Excuse me是在打扰对方之前表达歉意的话。- You are the same- The same to you 析 The same to you是表达我也祝您有个愉快的夜晚，它是美语中的习惯用法。 误 - Whats the pr

465、oblem?Ive got a headache 正 Whafs wrong with you?Fve got a headache 析 Whafs wrong with you?是询问对方身体状态如何，而 Whatrs theproblem?是问对方遇到了什么麻烦。 误 - Now, Im back Can I play?- Perhaps Youd better do your homework first 正 - Now, Pm back Can I play?Im afraid not Youd better do your homework first 析 Perhaps是表示对一种

466、拿不准的事态的推论，如： Am I right? Perhaps而 Pm afraid not 则表达一种不同意的态度。 be afraid的几种用法有：Pm afraid that you are right其后直接加宾语从句。- Will you come to my birthday party?- Fm afraid not I have to go to see my father He is in hospital其后+ n o t,表示否定。- Sorry, I don*t want to go there alone, Im afraid of the dog其后十名词，表示对

467、某人，某物的害怕。Mary is afraid of making mistakes in the exam其后+ of +动名词，表示害怕做某事。Mary is afraid to see the teacher because she didnt do well in the exam其后+ 不定式，表示不敢去做某事。 误 - How soon will you be ready?- Two days 正 - How soon will you be ready?- In two days 析 此题关键是要根据情景，身临其境，要注意的是对方问了什么，就应答什么。或答了什么就应问什么。 Ho

468、w soon问的是” 还有多久才能作完” ，这时要 用 in two d a y s ,即在两小时之内即可以作完。如 用 How long提问，则答语可以用two dayso- 1 dont mind- Monday and Tuesday of next week- When exactly- Monday and Tuesday of next week 析 有的对话是复杂的， 稍有不慎就有可能选错， 而且英语中如选错了答案是不容易找出错来的。 I dont mind是可以用来回答Would you mind这一提问的，但如仔细看一看则会发现我们要选用的不是陈述句而是疑问句。根据下面一句的

469、答语来判定要用when exactly?什么时间，这样才能与下句中具体的时间相符合。 误 Suppose your name is Tom The phone rings and you pick it up Thefirst word you say will probably be Who are you? 正 Suppose your name is Tom The phone rings and you pick it up Thefirst word you say will probably be Hello? This is Tom speaking? 析 在英语学习中，习惯用法

470、实际上在某种情况， 或某种意义上讲比语法更为重要。如果只从句子的角度上去分析，它们可能都是对的。比如，当你拿起电话时，如果你想知道对方是谁，可以问Whokthat(speaking)?”但不要讲”Whoare you?”如果你想先介绍一下自己可以讲 This is XXXX speaking”而不要讲Tm X X义义” 也不要讲“ My name is XXX XX. u就语法而论， Who areyou?” Tm XXXX My name is X X X X X ” 并不错， 也是英语中可用的句子，但就打电话这一场合，就不宜用了。 误 - D o you think its going t

471、o rain over the weekend?- 1 don*t hope so 正 - D o you think its going to rain over the weekend?- 1 hope not 析 由于初学者对实际英语口语中表达感情意愿的答语不熟悉， 如在肯定答语 中I think so I hope so I believe so 是相同的, 但在否定句中却常用Idonrt think so 但 I dont believe so 和 I dont hope so 则意为：我不信此事和我不希望此事发生。而I believe not 和I hope not 则为：我想可能

472、不会发生吧！ 误- Is anybody there?- No, Bob and Tom have asked for leave 正- Is everybody there?- No, Bob and Tom have asked for leave 析 许多学生在写作和选择答语或问句时总要语法在前， 而不是习惯用语在先。 所以总是要拘泥疑问句中的不定代词， 用anybodyo但 是Is anybody there?在英语中为：这里有人吗? 而Is everybody there?为：荃都到齐了吗? 所以首先要考虑的是其答语。No, Bob and Tom have asked for le

473、ave 误 - Your handwriting is very good!- No, my handwriting is very poor 正 - Your handwriting is very good!- Thank you 析 中国人遇到别人称赞，总是以谦逊为美德。 但英美人则往往认为自信是美德。所以当别人夸奖你或赞美你时，就应说：Thank you 又比如中国人见面时常讲 Where are you going?或 Have you had your breakfast yet?而英美人则认为你过多的干预别人的私生活了。 而他们见面时往往问一些无关紧要的话,如：Hello! Ho

474、w are you going?( 你过得怎样)Morning!等。而 good morning和How do you do 则被认为是较正规的问候语，在日常生活中则十分少见。 误 When you have had dinner with an American friend and want to leave youmay say： Excuse me Fil go first ” 正 When you have had dinner with an American friend and want to leave youmay say： Excuse me I have to go ”

475、 析 这两句答语都是正确的，其关键不是语法，而是习惯问题。如果在这样的场合你讲Ill go first 朋友们会迷惑不解， 而I have to go 则表示由于外界的特殊原因而造成的你要离去，而你本人则十分不愿做此事。 误 - Would you like to come to dinner tonight?- Fd like to, and Im too busy 正 - Would you like to come to dinner tonight?- Fd like to, but Pm too busy 析rm too busy 与 Fd like to 在意义上正好相反。 所以要

476、用转折连词。这里考查了对词义合乎逻辑的表达能力。所以要强调语言环境，更要强调在语言的基础上的词语辨析。 误 - Wheres D eter?- D eter will come with us tonight but he isnt very sure yet 正 - Wheres D eter?- D eter may come with us tonight but he isnt very sure yet 析 由于b u t所引出的句子可以看出Deter的来与不来是十分不确定的，所以应用m ay来表达一个不肯定的事件。 误 - Hi, havent seen you for ages!

477、 You look fine!- Great You look well too 正 - Hi, havent seen you for ages! You look fine!- Thanks You look well too 析 要注意的是Great在口语中多表示惊叹，而 Thanks则表示感谢对方的称赞。 所以对情景谈话要有准确的判定，要根据情景，身临其境，上下对照，周密思考，弄清场合，注意英美人的风俗习惯，注重语义上的词语辨析，并要进行大量的语言实践练习，扩大实际交际能力。（ 三）例题解析1 - Would you like to have some rice?A Yes, I li

478、ke B Yes, please C of course D Yes, I have 答案 B. 析 当对方对你发出邀请的问语时，如果你想接受则讲Yes, please 如不想接受则用No, thanks2 - Nice to see youA Good morning B Happy to meet you, tooC Nice to see you, too D Pleased to meet you, too 答案 c. 析 虽然A、B、D三个选项都可以作为某种问候语的答语，但英语中问候语的答语多用重复对方的话，以表达同样的心情。3 - Would you please give me

479、some water?AYes, I would BCertainly CNo, thanks DYes, please 答案 B. 析 当对方发出十分礼貌的请求帮助的问语时，一般的回答是肯定的。而Yes, please 为 是的，您请做某事吧 。这一含意显然不对。4 - Thank you very much for helping meA Youre welcome B It doesnt matterC No need D D ont say that 答案 A. 析 YouYe welcome译为中文为：不用谢。而 It doesn*t matter则为：没关系。5 - Hello,

480、Lucy How are you?-And you?A Fine, thanks B Yes, I amC Glad to meet you D Good afternoon 答案 A. 析 在正常交往中一定要避免所问非所答。所以对How are you?的答语应为” 很 好, 谢谢! ”6 - Help yourself to some meatA It sounds nice. B Yes, please.C Yes, Lets help each other. D Thank you. 答案 D . 析 Help yourself to some m e a t.你自己拿些肉吃吧。其意为

481、主人劝客人不要客气，像在家里一样。7 - Oh, I am not feeling well Fve got a coldA Fine, How are you? B Never mind Take careC Well, I rm sure to get weel soon. D Fm sorry to hear that 答案 D . 析 这是美国、英国的习惯用语，而 B、 C 则是中国人常讲的答语。8 - Meimei you speak English very wellA No, I dont think so B Thank you very muchC Not good enou

482、gh D Thats all right 答案 B.9 - Kate, could you answer the telephone, please?-, Mum Fil get it.A Yes, I could B No, thanks 答案 c. 析 要注意could用于口语中是为了讲话的口气委婉，但它不是过去时态,也不是助动词，而应看作情态动词。所以在答语中则不应这样用。10 - Could you look after Polly for me while were away?A No, thanks. B With pleasure.C Fm not afraid. D Pm su

483、re you will. 答案 B. 析 With pleasure 是英语中的一句十分客气的答语，用在当对方因你的帮助或你的许诺向你道谢时，表达自己十分乐意为对方效力的口气。11 - Hello! Could I speak to the headmaster, please?A Hold on, please. B Thats the headmaster, please.C Who are you ? please. D Sorry Im not the headmaster. 答案 A. 析 hold on, please 是指请对方等一等不要将电话放下的用语。如果要讲我就是的话不能用

484、th a t,而要用th is ,在电话用语中that指对方，this指自己。12 - Happy birthday!A Thank you. B The same to you.C Good luck. D Congratulations. 答案 A. 析 the same to you是同样祝贺对方的意思，不能用于生日这一祝贺语，除非两人的生日在同一天。13 - Im sorry I dont know the way, either Youd better ask that policemanfor helpA Good night. B Thats nothing.C Very wel

485、l. D Thank you all the same. 答案 D . 析 当向对方求助时，对方无能为力，这时的感谢语则为Thank you all thesame 意为不管如何还是要谢谢你。14 - 1 fell and hurt my leg last week, So I cant do anythingA Im sorry B D ont worryC Good luck D Bad luck 答案 D . 析 如果用A 则要用Im sorry to hear that 而不能单用Im sorry 因Imsorry是向对方道歉。而 bad luck为真是不幸啊。15 - _- 1 ha

486、ve got a coughA Whats your trouble? B What have you got?C Why did you come here? D Have you got a cough? 答案 A. 析 What*s your trouble?多用于问对方有什么问题、麻烦或得了什么病。这种用语还有 Whats wrong with you?16 - Would you like to go shopping with me?A Yes, Fd love to. B Thats right.C Yes, please. D Quite well. 答案 A. 析 表示愿意作

487、某事应讲：Id love to Id like to17 - Whats the weather like today!A It*s nice for a walk. B I like autumn best of all.C It will be fine tomorrow. D Itfs rather cold today. 答案D. 柒 本题要注意问的是什么，不要所问非所答。因问题是今天的天气怎样,所以只能选D18 - Is Jane in , please? I want to speak to her- Sorry, she is out Youd better A visit he

488、r in the office B call her laterC see her this afternoon D speak to her yourself 答案 B. 析 call her later晚些时候再来电话。19 - _- Very well, thank you, and you?A How do you do? B Good morningC How are you these days? D How do you like English? 答案Q 京本题是由答语来推断问话， 所以应熟悉英语的问答习惯：How do you do?的答语应为How do you do?20

489、 - How is your mother?A She is old. B She is no better than she was.C She is kind hearted. D She is in her forties. 答案 B. 析 How is your mother?问的是你妈身体如何，而 B 选项则是“ 她不比以前强” 。而其他三个选项则是所问非所答。21 - Thank you very much fbr your helpA Youre welcome B Please dontC Theres no trouble D No, no 答案 A.22 Your uncl

490、e has taken you to the cinema Afterwards you thank himHe says n .A It was nothing B Im glad you enjoyed itC D ont say it D No, neednt 答案 g 行 这是英语的答语，千万不要选A , 因它是中文习惯的答语。23 - Thank you fbr your good presentA It*s not good B No, noC My pleasure D Never mind 答案 C.24 When someone did a good deed for you

491、, you should sayA.you are too good Bits very kind of you C.you are very kind D .F11 thank you 答案 B.25-lam very sorry I am late fbr dinnerA.No, you arent B.Thats all right C.Yes, you are D .No, you dont 答案 B. 析 Thats all right 没关系。26 - Fm sorry if I hurt youA Im sorry B Its not trueC It doesnt matter

492、 D D ont say sorry 答案 C.27 - 1 should have gone to see the exhibition with youA Pm sorry B What a pityC It doesnt matter to me D Thats terrible 答案 B. 析 What a pity.真遗憾。第一句应为我真该和你一起去展览会。28 - Help yourself to some fishA You are very kind B Yes, Im helping myselfC Thank you D Yes, dont worry about me 答

493、案 C.29 - Are you ready? - .A Pm very sorry B Try to be patient 答案 C. 析 not y e t意为还没有完成。30 - Mum, I have passed the examA Thats all right B CongratulationsC You are luck D Good luck to you 答案 B.31 - 1 think I have to leave I hope we can get together againA All right B Thafs all rightC O K D I hope s

494、o, too 答案 D .32 Must I wait till he comes back? .A No, you neednt B No, you mustntC No, you may not D No, you cant 答案A.m m ust提问表示必须这样做吗? 而肯定句要用m u st,表示必须做，而否定句则要用needn-t表示没有必要做。33 - I pay you the house rent right away?- Yes, you have to do itA Shall B Way C Must D Have 答案 C.34 - D ont you think th

495、is colour is too bright?A Yes, I agree. B Yes, but I donft think so.C Yes, of course not. D Yes, whats wrong? 答案 A.35 - It was cold yesterdayA So was it B So it wasC I believe not so D I believe not 答案 g 析 当答语只是重复对方讲的话时，则不用倒装。因 soitw as即为：是的,天气昨天很冷。而当讲前面讲的动作也适合土另一个人时，则要倒装。如： Iwent to the cinema yest

496、erday So did I 表示对方去了 电影院， 我也去 了。36 - What do you think of the song?A I like music very much B I like it tooC With pleasure D It sounds sweet 答案 D . 析 sound在这里是系动词，为听起来很甜美。系动词后要用形容词，而不要用被动语态。37 D o you like tea or coffee? .A Yes, I do B Thank youC Thats fine D Either will do 答案 D . 析 either will do

497、为两者哪个都可以。38 I like your sweater very much .A No, it*s ugly B SorryC Thank you D Youre welcome 答案 C. 析 这是英美语言的习惯。39 He likes travelling by train .A So do I B I dosC I like so D I like it, neither 答案 A.40 - How do you like your school?A I like it very much B Its very beautifulC I doesnt like it D Very

498、 well 答案B. 柒 How do you like -是问你们学校是怎样值得你热爱的。也就是为什么你热爱你的学校。41 What a nice day!A Youre right. B No, isnt it?C Yes, isnt it? D Really? 答案 c. 析 Yes, isnt it 是的，难道不是个好天气吗？42 - Hello, ?- This is D ella speakingA Who are you B Are you TomC Who is that D Please tell me who are you 答案 c. 析 电话用语中that指对方，而 t

499、his指自己。43 -Whats he like?A He likes English B He is oldC He is like a farmer D He is tall and this 答案 D . 析 要区分Whats he like?如 What does he like?前者为：他长得什么样?而后者是：他喜欢什么。44 How did you do your job?Not very well, .A Pm sure B I am afraidC Thank you D Pm sorry 答案 B. 析 I am afraid我恐怕是, 我想是。45 - your aunt?

500、-She is a principal of a middle schoolA What does B Where doesC What is D Whom is 答案 C.46 - _- He is my bossA Whats the man? B Who is the man?C How is the man? D What does the man do? 答案B.47 - May I have your name?A No, no B You*re politeC Call me John D Its kind of you 答案C.48 - Shall I make coffee

501、for you?A Yes, thank you B No, donrt troubleC D on*t trouble this, thank you D No, don*t make it 答案A.49 - Could you show me the way to Mr Buowns office?A Not at all B Im sureC All right D I can do it 答案C.50 - Shall we go swimming tomorrow afternoon?A Its very kind of you B You are so thoughtfulC Tha

502、t*s a good idea D Yes, well go 答案c.四、 完形填空与阅读( - ) 知识概要完形填空是一种在语意封闭的情况下考察学生阅读能力及掌握语言基础知识能力的综合性题目。 学生应根据语义完整、语法正确的原则进行通篇阅读。借助文章的现成文字，通过逻辑思维，联系上下文，推断出可能的答案。然后再从所给选择答案中逐空选出在通读全文时脑海中已出现的答案填入空内。试推想在小学五六年级时去读 西游记 ， 水浒传 ，你也并非每个字都认得，每句话都能真正理解。但你还是可以明了全文的意思、 ，读得有滋有味。这就是语言能力。所以完形填空考查的就是你能否在缺字，不认得字、词语的情况下，能否全面

503、理解文章的正确意思，然后选入适当的词语。在选择后还要前后彼此呼应反复验证所选答案。有时答案一时不易验证，不要急于顺序填写，可能在填出后面答案时，而得到前面的答案。有时则需运用所学的词法、句法、时态和固定搭配等知识对4个选项进行分析，比较、排除干扰项，确定正确的答案。待答案全部选定后，一定要复读全文以验证：所选答案是否能使全文流畅，逻辑推理是否正确。 具 体 实 事 是 否 成 立 ，前后关系是否理顺。 语法是否正确，其中包括时态的选择、词汇选择、固定搭配等。在通读全文时最好在可能的条件下将所选答案填入文章中，反复阅读。而不要在文章空中只写选项的代号，这样影响全文的理解，不易找出错误之处。在做完

504、形填空时，应注意以下 几点：( 1 ) 重嬴首句，首段的开篇启示作用，读懂了第一句，或第一段有可能预测到全篇大意。( 2 ) 一定要顾及上下文间的语意联系。在完形填空的设计中，一般是以语义为第一要素同时兼顾语法。有 的4个选项单独填入这个单句中全是正确的，但拿到文中从下文联系起来看，则文理不通。为此要通篇考虑，顾及上下文的联系是十分重要的。( 3 ) 要坚持语意第一的原则，而语法应放于第二位。完形填空形式上是一种单项选择式的考察。 但实质上也是一种阅读能力和学生重建文意能力的考察。它一般是利用语法的正确性与内容排斥性的矛盾而命题的。所给答案大都是离开上下文均可说得通的。但语意上辩析、排斥才能找

505、到答案。例如：It took Charlie Mui several months to save up seven dollars He wanted toa model plane and went to the shop with the moneyA sell B buy C hold D bring这里肯定需要一个动词， 所给答案也都是动词， 但只能从意义上考虑而选B项。( 4 ) 要认真注意细节，做到语法正确。一些答案在意义上讲都是正确的，但从线索上看要找出语法正确的答案。如：Mr Evans is an old man of about sixty His wife died a

506、 few years ago His chiIdren him by then.A left B would leave C have left D had left答案应为D。这句话正确的语意都是 离开 ，但仔细发现有by then之说，由此可得出这是个动作的截止时间，应 选 为had left过去完成时态。 下面再看一些例子。( 1 ) 语意第一原则A young father was visiting an old neighbour They were standing in the oldmans garden and talking a b o u t .A trees B flo

507、wers C children D old people那么他们谈论的中心是什么呢? 可能是树、花，由于他们是在花园里谈论。但如果前后的段落配合看，则其谈论的也可能是孩子和老年人。这就是要求我们切勿望文生义。( 2 ) 语法正确，注意细节的原则在语意正确的前题下，还要根据学过的语法知识，及词语的固定搭配，选择正确答案。如：One night the dog began to bark suddenly It made Mr Erens to sleep He had to get up and tried his tostop it, but the beast wouldnt stop, a

508、nd kept on (3) A go not B not go C not to go D to not go A well B good C better D best A bark B to bark C barking D barked以上3 个小题中所给答案从语意上都是正确的，这就要求选择语法正确的那一个。第一空中根据句子结构，要填一个宾语补足语。而动词make后面的定语补足语应省去不定式符号t o , 且其否定式+ not,即不定式的否定式为notto d o , 而省去to 后则应为not d o . 在动词前直接+ not 故应选B。 而第二个空显然是一个固定搭配。语意上为：

509、Mr Erens尽力地阻止狗叫，所以应选D。 try one*s best是尽力而为之意。 第三个空显然是keep on doingsomething连雇不断之意，应 选 in g 的动词形式。其答案为C。( 3 ) 根据所给答案的不同词类，从不同角度分别考虑选择完形填空所给的词往往是不同类的，这就要求对不同词类作不同考虑。如果所缺的是动词，那么首先在选择语意正确的前提下，考虑动词的时态、语态和是否是要填入非谓语动词。若是介词或副词则要考虑是否固定搭配，以及介词、副词在结构和意义上的选择。若是连词，则应更多地从句子结构和上下文的连接上选择。若是代词，则应考虑性、数、格等方面，以及形容词和副词的

510、比较级和最高级等。fo he isnt drinking anything ”A as soon as B because C so D thoughA catching up with B getting on C looking after D waitingA at B for C into D out ofA always B often C still D alreadyA have woken B wake C had woken D will wakeA and B but C yet D too从文中看，第一选项，由于给了不同的连词，从意义选择应为B o 第二选项均为分词形式，

511、 也应从语意上选择， 其答案是D。第三选项给了四个介词， 而 into则是从外向里观看，所以应选C。第四项是副词still意为仍然，从意义上应选择 C。 而第五项所给的是同个动词，只是时态不同。从故事情景看，只能选完成时态A。 而最后一个选项是连词，由于句意则只能用b u t转折连词。从目前完形填空初中阶段的考察看，除语意第一外，更多地选择了单词的用法及意义，动词的时态，短语和惯用法等。为此，要做好完形填空题目，除有较好的阅读能力外，更要有扎实的语言基础知识及日常生活的逻辑推理能力。阅读理解能力在教学大纲中有明确的要求。它是目前条件下考查学生英语运用能力的常规题型之一，也是分值最高的题型之一。

512、学生的阅读理解能力如何，标志着学生继续深入学习的潜力有多大，它是集语法，词汇，逻辑推理背景知识于一体的综合语言能力的测试。 它除对学生的阅读理解的正确性进行测试外，同时从阅读速度、技巧、文化背景常识等方面对学生进行测试。 从近年各地中考题分析看，阅读类测试除为一般常规测试题型外， 在试题中所占分值较大,为此应引起学生特别注意。 如何做好阅读理解题呢? 首先要求考生有足够的基础知识和较好的阅读速度以及技巧方面的训练。同时还要注意以下几个方面的问题。1 要了解阅读测试的重点如上所述，阅读过程是一个综合作用的过程，为此阅读的测试就不能仅将着眼点放在语言结构的测试上，而是通过看，通过阅读获取信息的能力

513、。 在阅读一篇文章时，我们首先会想到： 文章说的是什么事情（ 即中心思想是什么） 。 事情发生的时间、地点、人物是什么。 作者所持态度如何。 结论是什么。 有些说明性信息在文章中容易获取，如：时间、数字、地点、人物等。有些信息如作者的态度，事件的结论，中心思想，文章的标题，则需通过文中线索，说明信息等等去分析推断才能获取。而这些说明性及内隐性的信息正是阅读理解的测试重点内容。而其难点在于理解、推断、得出结论时，应从英语国家的风俗习惯、语言习惯、宗教信仰、民族问题等方面来考虑，而不是仅从中国人的语言习惯来作推论。这也是这方面的难点之一。例： John drove a taxi through t

514、he busy streets of Boston every day John wasA a manager B a driver C a policeman D a dustman由此我们应能由drive a taxi来得出结论约翰是位出租车司机而不是别的什么人。例： Mrs Barkers sister was ill She had someone to look after her from Mondayto Friday, but not at the weekend, so every Friday evening Mrs Baker used to gooff to spend

515、 the weekend at her home in a neighboring town This meant that Mi-Baker First he had to drive home from the station Then he had to drivehis wife to the station to catch her train Who was ill?A Mr Baker B Mrs BakerC Mr Bakers sister D Mrs Bakers sister从这些只言片语中可以看出有三个人物出场，而问题的设计是表浅的，只要细心即可。 答案D .从中考阅读

516、命题中，由于考虑到考生的能力有限，和大部分学生毕业的要求，语言结构的测试占很大一部分比重。但对于要考入重点中学的学生来讲，仅仅几分较高要求的题目可能会决定他们的升学命运。因为这一部分分值是往往使学生棘手的那些隐性问题的测试。如：Like many other families in 1870, Katie Olson and her family had come to thegrassy plains of Kansas Katie liked the prairie and their new sold houseBut with no friends to play with, she

517、was very lonely Besides her mother andfather, she had only her little brother, Matt, for company She missed theirold home in Wisconsir Then one day her father had exciting news Somesettlers had bought the farm near the Olsons land Katie became so excited onhearing the news that she thought she might

518、 burst She begged her father to lether ride over with him to greet their new neighbors The two rode across theprairie They found Mr and Mrs Laski were hard at working building theirsod home Katie was disappointed She had hoped there would be somechildren to play with But soon Mr Laski called out Ann

519、a, and Carl, comeout of the wagon ” A boy and a girl jumped down and came over to KatieKatie didn*t believe it Her wish had come true1 Who was the most important person in the story?A Matt B Katie C Mr Laski D Anna and Carl2 What was Katies problem in the story?A She had no friend. B She didnt like

520、Kansas.C She couldnt ride a horse. D She didn*t like Anna and Carl.从上文中看，信息的获得不是直接的，而是必须通过整个文章的阅读，理清人物关系，掌握中心思想，才能作出正确的判定。如第一问故事中人物众多，但一直到读完才知，故事讲述了一个女孩Katie的事情。则她是故事的中心，所以应选择B 第二问是测试通过阅读是否了解了人物的心理情绪。 这些信息必须通过线索，综合判定，从而其结论是A。2 阅读理解的解题思路和方法阅读理解的测试点是在通过由于阅读所能够获取信息的能力上，所以解题思路的重点应放在：(1 )捻读全文，了解文章的主题和大意；

521、了解作者的写作目的、对事件的态度上。 The story doesnt say so, but it makes you think that.A family members often quarrel ( 争吵) about moneyB Africans do not change their way of doing businessC Africans refuse to use moneyD families do not help one another in the same way now 答案 D , On the whole this story is aboutA th

522、e life of some AfricansB changing from goods to using moneyC people helps one anotherD building roads across Africa 答案 B.从以上的问题看，所设提问均不是对某个具体事实。而是真对整篇文章，由此可见通读全文，掌握中心和作者的态度的重要性。( 2 )要注重文句间的相互关系。既注重主要情节又不可忽视细节。中考中阅读命题很多情况下是对事件的某个细节而进行测试的。彳 列 ：on Saturday afternoon they began with the back of the hous

523、e The nextSaturday Tom went to a football match while his wife painted the front of the houseThe next day they found they couldnt open any of the front windows Theyget them open at last, but they broke three of the seven and they were veryexpensive to repair They lasted for about daysA two B threeC

524、more than seven D Less than seven 答案A . They had to get someone to make repair for windowsA seven B four C ten D three 答案D.第一问中， 如不分析第一句和第二句中的两个Saturd ay,很可能会选择答案C。事实上，他们只干了两个S a tu r d a y ,而不是从这个星期六到下个星期六的7天时间。而第二问是他们弄坏了所有7个窗户中的3个，所以应选D。( 3 )特别注意首尾句在整个文章中的作用，以及它起到的启示和结论性作用。彳 列 ： Man has a big brai

525、n He can think, learn and speak.but no animallearns when we speak? Scientists do not really know They only know that mancan speak because he has a big brain这篇文章只要我们注意了首尾句，即可得出结论，它是讲述人类大脑与语言的关系的。人脑的其中一个作用是使他拥有语言，也就是和动物apes, d o g s有了根本的区别。这样这篇文章的许多细节可以迎刃而解了。 In what way are men different from animals

526、?A Men can understand things quickly.B Men can learn.C Men have learned language.D Men have brains. 答案C. Scientists now knowA how children learn to speakB why apes can learn a few wordsC mens brain helps him to learn to speakD what happens when men speak 答案 c.（ 3） What is the topic the writer wants

527、to talk about?A apes languageB mens brain and languageC human brainD animals learning 答案 B.以上只是做阅读练习中的一般分析，要取得优异成绩，还有赖于扎实的阅读基础和语言能力，以及平时的技巧训练和刻苦练习。要坚持每天至少读三四篇文章，以逐步提高自己的英语水平。（ 二）例题解析通读下面短文，掌握其大意。然后从短文后各题所给的四个选项中选择最佳的一项。Once there was a clever farmer Though he was poor, he decided one day totake the

528、king a roast goose （ 烤鹅） as a present He had not had 1to cat that day, and soon the 2 of the roast goose became toomuch for him as （ 当. . .口 寸 ） he 3 it to the king, so he ate one ofits legs When he came before the king and gave him the goose, the king4 saw that it had only one leg Now, the king 5wa

529、s bom with one bad leg, so he had never been able to 6properly （ 正常地） When he saw the goose with only one leg, he thought thefarmer had 7 this to laugh at him Of course he was very8 The farmer was told that if anybody laughed at the king, hewould be 9 at once nWhere is 10 leg of thegoose?*1 the king

530、 asked ” All the geese （ goose 的复数） in this 11of the country have one leg only, the farmer answered D o youthink Pm a fool（ 傻子） ？ the king shouted 12 , said thefarmer, if you look out of the window, you will see geese with one leg by the13 The king looked, and there the geese were 14on one leg besid

531、e the water The king at once told one of his men to15 them with a big stick, and of course, they 16their other legs and ran away There, said the king ” You werelying（ 说谎） That 17 that the geese here have two legs, likeall other 18 in the country But it doesnt show anything, ”answered the farmer, if

532、your men threw a big stick like that at me, I would growtwo 19 legs myself to help me to run a w a y 20H1 A less B all C little D muchNever23AAhead B neck C smell D temperaturereturned B carried C sent D handed5Aonce B really C himself D yet6Acome B walk C see D eat7Akept B done C made D found8Asorr

533、y B worried C sad D angry9Ahelped B killed C saved D covered10Aother B another C that D the other11Acity B village C farm D part12mindACertainly not B Of course C That*s nothing D13Ahole B forest C lake D house14Aswimming B resting C flying D lying15AfillB lockC hitD keep16Asent up B put down C did

534、with D moved away17Ashows B talks C sees D knows18Ageese B animals C legs D farmers19Aslower B faster C less D more20Amore slowly B more carefully C faster D earlier 答案 1D2 C3 B4 A5 C6B 7B 8 D9 B 10 D11D 12A 13 C 14 B 15 C16B 17A 18 A 19 D20 C1Astronger B younger C worse D less2Aget B try C use D ne

535、ed4Agot B played C missed D carried5Acaught B changed C started D stopped6Asurprised B kept C broke D hit7Ahalf B pair C group D double8Awon B saved C beat D joined9Ajust B already C about D almost10AT shirts B clothes C places D points 答案 1C2 D3 D4 A5 D6A7B 8 C9 A 10 B 析 在 1题中可以看出stronger, younger

536、worse, less四个选项全可以选，语法是正确的。从文章开始到这里并看不出其原因为什么要选择C , 这时只能将其选择空出往后面看，所以提醒考生要注意的是千万不要一一对完形填空作出选择， 有很多情况 是后面的情景决定了前面的选择。 当看到We even thoughtthat they had never seen a basketball before 和 We felt that we didnt need （ 2） anypractice against a team like that 则就肯定会得到第一个空的选项决不是比我们强壮，也不可能是少，更不可能是年轻、而是球技不佳，比我们差

537、得很远。而 5 题是要仔细考虑才能得到正确的结论。这四个动词都可以用在篮球运动中，但要注意的是，其后面的名词是p ass,在这里应译为“ 长传” 。而这个长传这里决不是开始， 而是被截住了。 所以这里应用stoppedo 即“ 拦截了一个长传。” 而 caught的宾语应换为ball球就对了。B 选项为“ 改变” ，用于这里就不合题意了。而 7 项虽然很多人都知道篮球规则，投一球按两分计算，但这里应选哪个词则拿不准了，主要在B 选项与D选项之间发生了问题。不知double的真实意义是“ 加倍，翻一翻” 之意，还是“ 一对，一双，两倍” 之意。其困难点还有9项， 它的选择应为ju st,这是由全

538、文所决定的。它的意思是不论一个队多么好，总会有一个队会比你强出一点儿，哪怕是仅仅一点点。这也就是完形填空不易拿满分之处。这里要提醒大家的是：语言是十分灵活的，要经常不断地学习思考才会有所进步。Peter was a small boy He lived with his parents in a small house near some hillsThe people there were all poor One night it was very dry and windyWhen everybody was asleep, Peter suddenly heard some noise

539、 It came outfrom the kitchen （ 厨房） He got up and walked to the kitchen He found thatthe wood beside the stove （ 火炉） was burning There was no water tap （ 水龙头）in the house, so he could not put out （ 扑灭） the fire He shouted loudly to wakeup everyone in the house Then he ran out of his house and knocked

540、 on thedoors of many houses to wake the people up They all left their houses quicklyAt last the fire was put out by the firemen Many houses were burntBut nobody was hurt in the fire1 Peter lived with hisA sisters B brothers C uncles D parents2 One night he found that beside the stove was burningA th

541、e table B the wood C the door D the window3 , so he could not put out the fireA Everybody was asleep B He couldnt shout loudlyC The kitchen was very big D There was no water tap in the house4 Peter knocked on the doors of many houses zA to wake the people up B to get some waterC to find his classmat

542、es D to visit them5 hurt in the fireA People in other houses were B Peters parents wereC Nobody was D Peter was 答案 1 D2 B3 D4 A5 C 析本题属于表层理解阅读考查题目， 因为完成其答案所需要的信息基本上可以直接从文章中获取，并不太多的需要推理和对环境，习俗的分析与了解。例如1题可直接从文章中He lived with his parents in a sm如中获取。2 题则可以从 He found that the wood beside the stove was b

543、uring 获取答案。3 题几乎是文章中的原句， There was no water tap in the house 所以得分率会很高。4 题也可从文章中： Then he ran out of his house and knocked on the doors of manyhouses to wake the people up 直接找出答案。5 题的答案则可以从文章中最后一句获得，如： But nobody was hurt in the fire o 这样的阅读题目，是属于表层理解题目，也就是为了那些获取毕业成绩的分数所设计的。其目的在于对普通同学给予适当的分以求达到毕业之目的。

544、这样的题目虽然容易，但还是要小心为好，不要粗心大意，以免不必要的丢分。1 How many children played the Indians?A One thousand. B One hundred. C One group. D One.A there were not enough children for the gameB the game was just going to startC none of his cousins wanted to be the IndiansD they were waiting for Joe3 Joe didnt say Cowboys

545、hang people out becauseA he was tied to a treeB that would make things worseC he was caught by the cowboysD that would make the cowboys angry4 Which of the following is TRUE?A One of Joes cousins was looking for matches.B D ad didnt want to give the children any matches.C Bobby wanted to get some ma

546、tches from his father.D Mum didnt think children should play with matches.5 The name of the story should be ”A Joe and his cousinsB Who knows what danger is waiting thereC Cowboys and Indians is a favourite childrens gameD How cowboys and Indians fought in the past 答案 1 D2 C3 B4 A5 B 析 本文在阅读过程中会感到难度

547、，而其问题与选项的设计更为困难。其难点不仅在于要阅读好文章， 而且要对问题和问题中的选择项作深入仔细地阅读。如1题的问句之意是有多少个孩子在游戏中扮演印第安人。 而文章中又有“Howmany Indians? I asked当 作 者 问 到 有 多 少 印 第 安 人 时 , 其 答 语 为 about athousand 这对于看不懂全文，而只认识个别单词的人就是一种很强的误导作用。因题目中问的是How m any,而文章中的数字是a thousand 但如果认真往下看则会发现：I was pushed out into the night and became a thousandInd

548、ians 我被推入了黑暗之中变成了一千个印第安人。所以文章暗示了一个小孩来扮演一千个印第安人。这种题目的得分率自然不会很高。紧接而来的2题则更困难，问题问的是Jo e的堂兄说他来的正是时候，是因为-这是要认真去推理来判定的。由文中的句子and before I could say n o这显然暗示了作者并不想扮演这样的角色，所以可以推论是没有人愿意扮演这个角色，但正在这个时候Jo e来了，而且不由分说把Jo e推入了角色之中。而3题则更加困难，其题目之意是Joe没有说出牛仔是绞死人 的这一句话是为了什么。从 文 章 中Jo e被一群孩子追逐后被抓住，十分不高兴，想从中解脱出来。因其他孩子讲我们

549、可以烧死他。所 以Jo e为了摆脱困境而要讲出的话是： 只有印第安人才烧人，而牛仔是用绳子绞死人。 后半句没有讲出来，是因为他看到如果要烧死人还需要找柴，找火柴，还是要一段时间的，但绳子就在他身上，如果绞死人那几乎是立刻马上之事。所以其答案选择了 B。 这样的话可能会使事情更糟。4题的题目是简单的，即下面陈述中那个是真实的。由于中考英语答案是唯一的，所以只有一个是符合标准的。这时可以采用选取正确答案的方法，但实际上更好的办法是排除法。把不正确的排除后再对其他项进行对比，作出选择。这叫作所谓的排除法。首先排除的应是C选项，因文章中讲在他们上车回家的路上妈妈问他： 为 什 么Bobby要火柴，他问

550、爸爸是否有火柴。 这里的爸爸显然指的是Jo e的爸爸而不是Bobby的爸爸。而其他三个选项则都处于可选之例：如A项 应 为Jo e的一个堂兄在找火柴。B项是爸爸不想给孩子任何火柴。D项是妈妈认为孩子们不应玩火柴。而B项，在文章中根本没有进述Joe爸爸的态度，所以应首先放弃，而D项是可以从推理中得到的，要不然他的母亲不会在车上问这个问题，但是文章中并未直接提出来，所以只有A是对的。因其妈妈讲Bobby是 向Joe的爸爸寻找火柴。而5项则更是要全文反复阅读才可能领会到其中的原由的。文章的题目要概括全部文章内容，但更重要的是从中抽取最重要的，也就是作者的主要意图。从文章的最后两句，当作者反问他妈妈时

551、说：” 他真的在找火柴? 火柴、你敢肯定他是在找火柴吗? ” 妈妈表示十分肯定，而作者再也不讲什么了。显然他感到如果玩下去危险的存在。所以其答案是B。这也就是中考中要求较高的题目，虽然分数不多但对要进入重点高中的学生来说，这是个关键问题，也就是成功与失败的焦点所在。1 From the story we know thatA the writer was poor and didnt buy the bookshelf for his wifeB the writer*s wife didnt like the bookshelf at allC the writer was always g

552、lad to buy something for his wifeD the writer was not very glad to buy the bookshelf for his wife2 What made the writer think that carrying furniture was a good idea?A He could drive slowly and it was safeB Other drivers would let him go firstC His wife could use a new bookshelf3 Why were the police

553、 and other drivers so kind to the writer?A Because they thought the writer liked studying very much and needed abookshelfB Because they didnt think it was polite to overtake a car with a bookshelf on itC Because they thought somebody in the writers family had died and he neededhelpD Because they tho

554、ught it was dangerous to carry a bookshelf on a car4 Why did the writers wife begin to laugh?A Because now she knew what mistake the police had madeB Because at last her husband understood why the police had driven to thechurchC Because the officer was always looking at the flowers and the bookshelf

555、D Because the police had helped them a lot5 When did the officers begin to realize（ 意识至ll） they had made a mistake?A Before they arrived at the churchB Before they overtook （ overtake 的过去式） the writers carC After one of them looked at the flowers and the bookshelf carefully at thechurchD After the w

556、riters family left the church 答案 1 D2 B 3 C4 A5 C 析 这篇文章有英国幽默的味道。 英国的幽默是十分特别的， 它一般都是讲述一个故事，但当结尾时仅几句话则道出天机来。对于这样的文章要从头认真看到尾，不要在考场中为了赶时间自认为是全懂了，其实则不然。造成不必要的丢分。从 1题可以看出作者十分不情愿地为其妻子买了个书架呢。第二段则出现 Buy it ” 这样的祈使句。初学者不易看出里面的原委。要知道祈使句在对话中常常带有命令，或不客气之意，所以从这里开始已看出作者的情绪了。其后的What can I do?又是一句抱怨的话， 我还能作什么吗, 其后又

557、是一句风趣的抱怨： Ten minutes later I was twenty dollars poorer 即暗示十分不情愿地又花了 20美元。 所以其答案是D。其后2 题则是推理题， 从作者买了书架之后一连串的奇怪事情发生了。首先是其他的驾驶员开车对他十分的礼貌，甚至警察阻挡其他车辆让他先行。所以其答案是B。第 3 题则一句道破天机。因为前两件事已使作者感到奇怪了。后来警察竟然亲自驾驶汽车为他开道。而且警察并不知道他要去什么地方就把他带到教堂来了。这是因为英美人一生三件大事都要在教堂做：其一是出生时在教堂洗礼，其二是结婚，其三则是死亡。所以警察不问其由而将他带到教堂是为了帮助他。所以答案

558、是C o 当警察讲到Wethought it w aser something else?时，显然有个词是不好意思讲出口的，所以道出了文章的真实情况。这时不难对5 题作出答复其答案是C附录中学生英语学习常见错误一览表A 误 I think it is an useful English dictionary. 正 I think it is a useful English dictionary. 析 在不定冠词a 与an的用法中要注意的一点是：an用在以元音开头的词之前； 而 a 则用在以辅音开头的词之前。 要特别注意的是以u 字母打头的单词，如 useful,university等，其第一

559、个音标是 j , 所以要特别予以注意。 误 I need a hour to finish this letter. 正 I need an hour to finish this letter. 析 要注意hour和honest的第一个字母不发音。 误 My teacher is a unknown man, but he is a very good man. 正 My teacher is an unknown man, but he is a very good man. 析 要注意以u 打头的单词，它的发音为 时，单数名词前要用an,如 uncle等。 误 There is a in

560、 the word football”. 正 There is an fr in the word football”. 析 英文字母单独使用时， 如其第一个发音是元音时， 其前面的不定冠词应该用an而不是a. 误 I have a little brother. He is a 8 year old boy. 正 I have a little brother. He is an 8 year old boy. 析 要注意这些字母的第一个发音为元音，如 eight, eleven等。able 误 This bike is able to be repaired. 正 This bike ca

561、n be repaired. 析 be able to 主要表达某事或某人具有某种能力去作某事， 应译为” 有本领“ 、” 有能力” 、” 可以“ 作某事，如 : Fm able to swim across this river.而 can 可以用来表示具有接受能力或吸收能力。如：This radio can be repaired here.about 误 This class is about to begin just now. 正 This class is about to begin. 析 要注意be about t。是“ 将要” 的意思， 含有将来时之意， 不要与表示过去时的时

562、间状语连用。 另外， be about to 一般用作书面语， 对应的口语是be goingto.about onabout与 on都可以作“ 关于” 讲， 但却有所不同, 例如： This book is about physics.应译为 这是一本关于物理学的科普读物。 而： This book is on physics. 则应译为“ 这是一本物理学方面的专著。”above 误 The temperature is five degrees over zero. 正 The temperature is five degrees above zero. 析表达” 在. . . 上方” 时

563、, above与over是可以互换的， 如: The sky is above(orover)our heads.但是要表达在垂直方向上的上方时则应用above不可用over,如： The sun has risen above the horizon. 误 There is often thick cloud above the South of China in summer. 正 There is often thick cloud over the South of China in summer. 析 当表达覆盖之意时，只可用ov6r而不能用above. 误 There is a b

564、ridge above the river. 正 There is a bridge over the river. 析 用来表达” 从 上方越过 时不能用above只能用over,如：The planeflew over the city.但要注意 There is waterfall above the bridge.则应译为“ 在桥的上游有一个瀑布。”across 误 He ran across the wood. 正 He ran through the wood. 析 across是指某一动作在一平面内进行，而 through则是指该动作在一三维立体空间的运动过程。如：The man

565、 came in through the window. He walkedacross the square.acrossacross的主要用法有两个。 其一， 意为“ 对面 ， 如： There is a school just across thestreet.其二，意为“ 横过 ，如：He walked across the street.afraid 误 I dont*t afraid of him. 正 I am not afraid of him. 析 要注意“ 害怕 afraid一词在英语中不是动词，而是形容词，要与be动词连用。after 误 Two weeks after

566、he left. 正 Two weeks later he left. 正 He left after two weeks. 析 要表达” 在多少时间之后” ，英语中有两种表达法，即：用 later时，要时间在前,如 three hours later;而用after时要时间在后，如 after three hours. 误 My father will be back after a few hours. 正 My father will be back in a few hours. 析 受中文的影响， 这个介词常常被误用。当你要表达在一段时间内某个动作可以完成时，一定要用i n ,而不能

567、用after,因为after是指在某一时间之后。例如： This work will be done in two days.即表明在两天内这一工作一定会做完。而如用了 after,即表示在两天之后，完成的时间是不确定的。after behindafternoon 误 He worked very hard in a hot afternoon. 正 He worked very hard on a hot afternoon. 析 习惯用的词组in the afternoon,如果加入任何修饰词后其前面的介词in都要改为o n ,不论其修饰词在前还是在后，如：He swam in this

568、river on theafternoon of June 1st. 又如： Are you free on Sunday afternoon?against 误 He against me. 正 He is against me. 析 要注意against意为“ 反对” ，但它在英文中却不是动词，而是介词，如要讲反对某事或某人时则要加动词b e ,如：He is against somebody/something.against foragainst意为“ 反对“ 、“ 不赞成 ；而 for则意为“ 同意” , 为其反意词。如：Are youfbr or against the plan?

569、age 误 He is twenty years old of age. 正 He is twenty. 正 He is twenty years old. 正 He is at the age of twenty.ago 误 Toms father has been dead five years ago. 正 Toms father died five years ago. 析 ago意为由说话时算起， 若干时间以前。 它只能和一般动词过去时连用,而不要与完成时连用。 析 要注意的是在本句是ago是用在由since引起的从句之中，只是从句应用过去时，但不影响主句的时态。agree 误 D

570、oes the teacher agree to us? 正 D oes the teacher agree with us? 误 D oes he agree with our plan? 正 D oes he agree with us? 析 agree w ith指“ 同意某人的提议、建议、计划” 等。如果要讲同意某项计戈妆要用 agree to ,如：D o you agree to the plan?all 误 The old man has two sons. All of them are workers. 正 The old man has two sons. Both of

571、them are workers. 析 all是指三者或以上的全部，而both则是指“ 两者都“ 。 误 The all children are playing football now. 正 All the children are playing football now. 析 a ll作修饰词时其位置要在所有的修饰词之前，不论这些修饰词是定冠词、指示代词、形容词或名词，或代词的所有格。 误 You all are right. 正 You are all right. 析all作同位语时其位置要置于年动词之后， 实意动词之前， 如: The teachersall work hard.

572、或用于第一助动词之后，如：The boys have all been waiting fortheir mothers.almost 误 Nearly nobody thinks he is right. 正 Almost nobody thinks he is right. 析 nearly与almost是近意词，其含意差别不大，但是与否定词连用时要用almost,例如：She brought almost no money with her.此句中的 almost 不能用nearly 替换。alone 误 The old man lived lone but he didn*t feel

573、 lonely. 正 The old man lived alone, but he didnt feel lonely. 析alone, lone, lonely三个词全具有“ 孤单、 孤独” 之后。 但其用法不同： lone可以作定语，而 alone则只能作表语， lonely则多指感情上与感觉上的孤独。already 误 We are already for the work. 正 We are all ready for the work. 析already 是副词， 其意为“ 已经” , 如： He already knew about it.而 all ready为形容词意为“ 准

574、备好” 。already yetalready 多用于肯定句中，例如：The students have already finished the work,而yet 则多用于疑问句与否定句中， 如： Have you finished it yet? I havent finished ityet.also 误 I didn*t find the dictionary also. 正 I didn*t find the dictionary either. 析 作为 也” 讲，在否定句中要用either而不能用also.also tooalso与 too都可用在肯定句中表示“ 也” ，但 a

575、lso通常用于be动词或情态动词之后，如：I can also do it myself.而 too 一般放于句尾。FU attend his class, too.always 误 Always he asked himself why he had come here. 正 He always asked himself why he had come here. 析 always 一般不能用于句首，它在一般句中的位置是于动词之前第一助动词之后，如：Ive always thought he is honest.又如：He is always late.among 误 If the thr

576、ee apples are divided among the two boys how much will eachreceive? 正 If the three apples are divided among the three boys how much will eachreceive? 析 among常用于三个事物或人物之间，而 between则多用于两者之间。an 误 This is an useful dictionary. 正 This is a useful dictionary. 析 详见a 条。n dnJnJnJnJ误正误正析rLrL_LrLrLHe did not s

577、peak loudly and clearly.He did not speak loudly nor clearly.Our school is not in New York and Chicago, but in Boston.Our school is not in New York or Chicago, but in Boston.“ 和“ 这一概念在肯定句中应用an d ,但在否定句中则要用orangry 误 My mother was angry to me. 正 My mother was angry with me. 误 He was angry with what I s

578、aid. 正 He was angry at what I said. 析 要注意be angry后面如果接人，表示“ 对某人生气不满” 时应用be angrywith somebody. 但要接事物时要用 be angry at something.another 误 I have two sisters, one in America and another in English. 正 I have two sisters, one in America and the other in English. 析 要注意英语中 another, other, the other, the ot

579、hers, others 的不同用法，现分别说明如下：another作形容词其意为：泛指的另一个或再一个，别的，类似的。一般在句中作定语， 1 : This is not good enough, please show me another one.another 还可以作为代词用， 如： One student said： 1 want to play baskball.anothersaid： nI want to play football.* other作形容词其意为” 泛指其余的，别的” 。如:I have other books besides these. 又如： Ask so

580、me other people please, the other 贝 ij为特指，作形容词时其后面可接单数或复数名词，如：She has two flowers. Oneis white, the other one is yellow.（ 特指，单数） 又如：There are fifty students in ourclass, twenty five are boys, the other students are girls.（ 特指, 复数） 但当 the other作为代词时， 它代表的可以是单数， 也可以是复数， 如： He has a book in one hand,an

581、d a pen in the other.（ 单数） 又如： There are some people in the room. Four aregirls, the other（ 复数） are boys.要注意的是当the other自主语时,其后面的谓语动词要视具体情况而定，它可能是单数，也可能是复数。others则只能作代词,其意为other ones即为：泛指某些，某一部分人或物，如：Each of us must thinkof others.而 the others只能作为代词， 它是特指某一些人或物， 如： I know onlyone or two of the stude

582、nts; the others are unknown to me.answer 误 Someone is knocking at the door. Please reply the door bell. 正 Someone is knocking at the door, Please answer the door bell. 析 answer与 reply是近意词，作为及物动词用时有时二者是可以互换的，如：The student answered/replied that he wanted to watch TV.但在某些特定场合则不易互换。 作为应答之意时则多用answer,如：

583、You should answer to your name.Please answer my letter as soon as possible. Answer my question in English.alnJnJnJnJu_IJ误正析误正析rLrLrLrLrLrLD o you have some questions?D o you have any questions?some一般要用于肯定句，而 any则用于否定句或疑问句。China is larger than any other countries in Asia.China is larger than any othe

584、r country in Asia.要注意any other其后要跟单数名词， 0 any of the other其后要接复数名词。 China is larger than any of the other countries in Asia. 误 Here are some books; you can choose anyone of these. 正 Here are some books; you can choose any one of these. 析 anyone只能指人，而 any one即可指人 也可以指物。around 误 The nine planets go ar

585、ound of the sun. 正 The nine planets go around the sun. 析 around 后面不要再加介词，如：The sun shines all around us.around round作介词用的around与 round通常可以互换，只不过美语常用around,而英语常用 round,例如： You can see the post office round/around that comer.（ 绕过那个弯你就可以看到邮局。但是一定要区别它们的不同之处：round可以用作形容词、副词、 介词、 动词、 名词； 而 around只能用作副词或介词

586、。 例如： The post officeis just round （ around） the house （ 用作介词） . He has round face （ 用作形容词） . Theriver rounded the stones.（ 用作动词）arrive 误 I arrived Beijing the day before yesterday. 正 I arrived in Beijing the day before yesterday. 正 I reached Beijing the day before yesterday. 误 He arrived in the sch

587、ool at 11 I 00. 正 He arrived at the school at 11 ： 00. 析 arrive为不及物动词，当到达的是较大的地理区域时用介词i n ,而到达较小的地方时则用 a t,如：arrive in New York, arrive at the village.arrive reach getarrive如上所述是不及物动词， 而reach则是及物动词。 如： How did you reach theschool this morning?而 get可用作不及物动词，作“ 到达” 讲时其后面多与to连用。如：When did you get to Ne

588、w York?as 误 This man works in the bank for a manager. 正 This man works in the bank as a manager. 析as 与 for 有时是可以通用的。 如： This room is used as （ for） a classroom.是用来指官衔、职位时只能用as. 误 My brother is so taller as Tom. 正 My brother is as tall as Tom. 析 as a s之间只能用形容词与副词的原级，而不能用比较级。在否定句中可以用soa s ,也可以用asa s ,

589、但在肯定句中只能用asa s ,如：He is notso tall as Tom. 误 Ill give him the note as soon as he will come. 正 Fil give him the note as soon as he comes. 析 as soon as所引导的状语从句中应使用一般时态表示将来。ask 误 The student asked a question to the teacher. 正 The student asked the teacher a question. 析 ask 应接双宾语，即 ask somebody somethin

590、g. 误 They asked some books. 正 They asked for some books. 析 向某人要求某物时应用 ask somebody for something 或 ask for somethingfrom somebody, 如： He asked his mother for some money. 或 He asked for somemoney from his mother.asleep 误 He is deeply asleep. 正 He is fast asleep. 析 要讲“ 熟睡 ，就要用fast来修饰asleepo另外， 在英语中一般不

591、讲somebody is sleeping而 要 用 asleepo关于睡觉这一词的惯用法还有：go tosleep（ 如： The old man usually goes to sleep at ten.） , fall asleep（ 如： I fell asleep atEnglish class yes terday.）at 误 It will really do you no harm quite. 正 It will really do you no harm at all. 析at all和quite的汉语意思均为“ 全然“ 、 “ 确定的“ ， 但 at all适用于否定句，

592、例如： -Im sorry. Tm late.-No trouble at all.又如：I dont think it is right at a ll.而 quite 则适用于肯定句，例如：He is quite agood teacher. 误 The children play football for lunch. 正 The children play football at lunch. 析 英语中的at lunch为” 在吃午饭时“ 。这种惯用法还有at work（ 在工作） ，at table（ 在吃饭） ， at desk（ 在学习） 。 而 for lunch则是为午饭而

593、准备的食物， 又如：We had some milk for breakfast. 误 There is a post office in the corner of the street. 正 There is a post office at the corner of the street. 析 at the corner是指墙外面的角，而 in the comer是指建筑物内部的角落。例如： There is a computer in the corner of the room. There is a street lamp at thecorner of the street.a

594、t in on在表示时间时用来表示具体钟点用at, ： He will be back at six.表示一天的上、下午时要用 in,如：I usually get up at six in the morning.但要注意的是，in themorning和 in the afternoon这两个词组中如果加入了任何修饰词， 其介词要换为on, 如：on the cold morning, on the hot afternoon.又如：See you on Mondaymorning.如讲到具体的某一天，要用 o n ,如：on Sunday,如：I usually want tovisit

595、 my mother on Sundays.在谈到周、 月、 季、 年时要用 in ,如： All the childrenwill be happy in Easter week. He was bom in July.但要注意在泛指圣诞节、复活节、感恩节时都用 a t,如：Where are you going at Easter.Bback 误 Fm sorry. I have to back home. 正 Im sorry. I have to go back home. 正 Im sorry. I have to go home. 析 back用作“ 回到（ 某处） ” 之意，不是

596、动词。be 误 Where do you from? 正 Where are you from? 析 你从何处来” 应为 Where are you from?或 Where do you come from?但要注意这两句话均是问对方从哪个国家来的。要是口语中问” 你是从什么地方来？ ” 应讲 Where did you come from?回答用 I came from the library.beat 误 We have won your class. 正 We have beaten your class. 正 We have won the game. 析 win是胜过之意，它是及物

597、动词，但其后的宾语只能接比赛、战争、奖品、奖金的名称，如 : Which team won the football match?而 beat指打败对手、敌人. . .如：My brother beat me at poker.（ 要注意的是，beat的过去式与原形相同，而过去分词为beaten） o 误 The ball beat me badly. 正 The ball hit me badly. 误 He used to hit the little boy black and blue. 正 He used to beat the little boy black and blue.

598、析 beat指打击多次，而 hit则为击中对方的一次性打击。beautiful 误 He is a beautiful boy. 正 He is a handsome boy. 析 我们可以讲 She is a beautiful girl. This is a beautiful park.但要讲男人的”英俊” 时要用handsome.because 误 The reason why I was late is because I was ill. 正 The reason why I was late is that I was ill. 误 Because it was Sunday,

599、so the park was crowded. 正 Because it was Sunday the park was crowded. 析这种错误是因为中文的习惯与英语的表述法不同， 中文常讲我来晚了的原因是因为我病了，而英文中的第二个因为要用that代替。又因中文常讲因为所以，而英文中用了因为就不能再用所以了，同样用了“ 所以“ 也就不要再用“ 因为 一词。 例如： Because we study hard, we passed the exam easily.或者： We study hard so we passed the exam easily.because because

600、 ofbecause 后要接从句， 例如： We like physics because we can learn a lot of new ideas.而 because of 后要接名词作介词宾语， 如： He is not at school because of the illness.before 误 We have two hours to kill before we will go home. 正 We have two hours to kill before we go home.英语状语从句中要用一般现在时表示将来的动作。 如： If it rains we will

601、not go tothe park. 误 I did this work two days before. 正 I did this work two days ago. 析用 ago组成的时间状语其主句中的谓语动词要用过去时， 而 before引起的时间状语其主句中的谓语动词多用完成时， 如： I has done this work a few daysbefore.before long long beforebefore long 是“ 不久” 之意， 例如： I shall go to America before long.而 long before则是“ 很久很久” 之意, 如：

602、We knew this teacher long before we saw him.（ 我们在看到这位老师之前很久就知道他了。）begin 误 The meeting will begin from Monday. 正 The meeting will begin on Monday. 误 The film has begun for ten minutes. 正 The film has been on for ten minutes. 析 begin是瞬间动词， 所以它的完成时态不能接表示一段时间的状语，如：The film has begun.这句话是对的，即” 电影已经开始” 。但

603、要讲已经开始10分钟了则要用has been on即” 上演了 10分钟，begin startbegin与 start两词后面加不定式或动名词都可以，且意思并无区别，但在表达习惯时接动名词的用法较多， 如： How old wem you when you first started learningEnglish?但这两个词的进行时态中则多用不定式, 如: I was beginning to gethungry.但如果句子的主语是物而不是人，则多用不定式，如：The ice began tomelt. It started to get dark before we got to sch

604、ool.当动词是表达某种心理状态时，要用不定式，如：The student began to understand his mistakes. 误 They study hard in the class from the beginning to the end. 正 They study hard in the class from beginning to end. 析 from beginning to end是习惯用法，即自始至终，不要加冠词，但如单独使用则要加冠词，例如：At the beginning,the teacher gave us an exam.behindbelow

605、 误 Whats that below the chair. 正 Whats that under the chair. 析 under意为“ 正下方” ，而 below意为“ 比低” ，或指“ 在下游” 。如：There is a fall below the river.（ 河的下游有一个瀑布。 ） 其反义词为over,如： Thereis a big plane flying over the city.但在” 下面的例子 一表达语中则要用theexample below,而不要用 under.beside 误 The students stood besides the teacher

606、. 正 The students stood beside the teacher. 误 I study English beside Chinese. 正 I study English besides Chinese. 析 beside意为” 在. . . 旁边” , 而 besides是 除. . .以外（ 还如何尸。beside by nearbeside 意为 在 旁 ，如：There is a tall tree beside the river, by 多指“ 倚、靠” 、“ 沿着” 之意， 如： She is standing by the window, near多用来表示两

607、地间距离不远，如： There is a post office near our school.better 误 You had better to do it at home. 正 You had better do it at home. 误 You hadnt better wake me up at six. 正 You had better not wake me up at six. 析 had better在肯定句中为” 应该作某事” ，其后加不带t。的不定式，而在否定句中应用had better+not+动词原形。 在简答语中had常省略为d ,如： Youdbetter n

608、ot.又如：Lets go first. No, we*d better not.between 误 Among the two trees there is a space of the feet. 正 Between the two trees there is a space of the feet. 析 两者之间多用between,三者或三者以上之间则用among. 误 You must choose between this club or that club. 正 You must choose between this club and that club. 析 在两个之间作出选

609、择要用between,- a n d - 而不能用betweenor.big 误 There was a big rain last night. 正 There was a heavy rain last night. 析 大雨在英语中只能用a heavy rain而不要用a big rain.bit 误 He is a bit fool. 正 He is a bit of a fool. 析 abit可以作程度副词，与alittle相同，但它用于名词前应用a bit o f,而用于形容词前则应用a b it,如：Im a bit tired,而其简答的否定句应为Not a bit,（ 一点

610、儿也不。） 又如：-D o you mind if I open the door?-Not a bit.black 误 The children became black after swimming in the sea. 正 The children became sunburned after swimming in the sea. 析 因太阳照晒而皮肤变黑，不应用black而应用sunburned, sun colour或dark. 误 The girl has black eyes and blackhair. 正 The girl has dark eyes and black

611、 hair. 析 英语中black eyes的意思是被打得发青的眼睛。 误 The Europeans like red tea. 正 The Europeans like black tea. 析红茶在英文中应为black tea.这种惯用法还有： black and blue（ 鼻青脸肿,青一块紫一块） ；black and white（ 黑白电视片） 。go black意为” 在失去知觉时眼前一片黑暗” ；look black意为” 情况不妙，前景暗淡” 。如： After the fight hewas black and blue.On TV, I like colour for s

612、omething and black and white forothers.dy误正析orLrLrLnJnJnJGoing to bed earlier and getting up earlier is good fbr your body.Going to bed earlier and getting up earlier is good for your health.中文常讲对你身体有利，而英文中则讲对你健康有利。borrow 误 May I lend some books from the library? 正 May I borrow some books from the l

613、ibrary? 误 How long can I borrow it? 正 How long can I keep it? 析 英语中有三个词都可译为 借“ ，但意义各不相同如：“ 借入” 是borrow,其常用句型结构是borrow something from somebody,这是个瞬间性动词，不可与表示延续的时间状语连用。 例如： The students want to borrow some books fromthe library. “ 借出 用le n d ,即借给别人东西。其常用句型是lend somebodysomething, 或 lend something to s

614、omebody. 例如： Could you lend us your dictionary?或 Could you lend your dictionary to us?它也是瞬间性动词，也不能与延续的时间状语连用。keep则是延续性动词，可以和表示长时间段的时间状语连用，也可与 how long 等疑问词连用，如：You can keep it for three days.born （ bear的过去分词） 误 I born in Shanghai. 正 I was bom in Shanghai. 误 He was born from Greek parents. 正 He was b

615、orn of Greek parents. 析” 出身于. . . 样的家庭” 不要作from而要用of,例如: He was born of a poorfamily.both 误 They both are students. 正 They are both students. 误 They refuse both to answer this question. 正 They both refuse to answer this question. 析 both作同位语时，一般要用在be动词之后实意动词之前。 误 I know his both parents. 正 I know bot

616、h his parents. 误 The both brothers were students. 正 Both the brothers were students. 正 Both brothers were students. 析 当both与形容词性物主代词my, his, her等以及定冠词the连用时，都应将这些词置于both之后。另外，在与定冠词连用时the可以省略。 误 Both of my parents are not at home. 正 Neither of my parents are at home. 误 Both of your answers are not ri

617、ght. 正 Neither of your answers is right. 正 Both your answers are wrong. 析 both不能用于否定句中作主语。表示“ 两者都不“ 时要用neither;但作宾语时both与either则都对， 但要注意句意有所不同。例如： I cannot give both ofthe books to you.（ 我不能将两本书全给你。） 而 I cannot give either of the books toyou.（ 两本书中哪本书也不能给你。）bring 误 Please bring this dictionary to Mr

618、 Brown. 正 Please take this dictionary to Mr Brown. 析 英语中bring是“ 带来 ，而 take是 带走 。还有一个词fetch,表示 到某处去把某物取、接回来” o 如：Please fetch the doctor at once.business 误 My father went to Shanghai for business. 正 My father went to Shanghai on business. 析 on business 出差nJnJnJTJnJnJSy误正析误正析urLrLrLrLrLrLThe students

619、were very busy to prepare for the exam.The students were very busy preparing for the exam,be busy doing something 为 忙于作某事”The students were busy for the exam.The students were busy with the exam.busy直接接名词时应用with.blut 误 He couldnt help but realizing that he was wrong. 正 He couldn*t help but realize t

620、hat he was wrong. 误 She couldnt help to cry when she saw her mother. 正 She couldnt help crying when she saw her mother. 析couldnt help其后应接动名词， 表示情不自禁的动作， 但 couldnthelpbut后面要加动词原形即省to 的不定式，所以前一句应译为 他才真正认识到他错To ”buy 误 I have bought this dictionary for three years. 正 I have had this dictionary for three

621、 years. 析 buy是截止性（ 即瞬间） 动词，它可以有完成时，如 I： I have bought thisdictionary. 但是不能与表示较长的时间状语连用。如要讲我这本字典已买了 3年了则要用have had这一结构即我拥有这本字典已3 年了。by 误 The boy shot the cat by a gun. 正 The boy shot the cat with a gun. 误 He came to school by a taxi this morning. 正 He came to school by taxi this morning. 析作为某种运输手段素讲，

622、 by与名词间不能有冠词， 如： by car, by bike, bya ir等。如有了冠词或其他修饰词，则应用别的相应的介词，如：” 我们今天早上是乘他的车来的” 一句应译为：We came here in his car this m orning.与by结合而成的词组很多， 常用的有: by the way顺便说说; by hand手工制作; by oneself独自地；by no means决不。cnJnJnJnJnJu误正误正析arLrLrLrLFLcIll call at Mr Brown.Fil call on Mr Brown.ril call on Mr Browns ho

623、me.ril call at Mr Browns home.作“ 拜访“ 讲时，at后面接访问地点，而on后面接访问的人。call on drop in visitcall on比较正式的为公务的访问，如：We were called on by the old students.而drop in则是比较随便的走走，顺便拜访, 如：If youYe free, drop in .而 visit则是更正式的外交访问或友好往来，如：My schoofs headmaster will visit Americanext week.can 误 A blind man can not judge co

624、lours. 正 A blind man cannot judge colours. 误 I cann*t call for you at ten. 正 I cant call for you at ten. 析 can的否定形式应为cannot或cant. 误 Its only six oclock. That mustn*t be the postman. 正 Its only six oclock. That cant be the postman. 析 must用来表示一种肯定的推断，如：She must have some problems. Shekeeps crying.但在否定

625、句中则要用can*t, 要表示对过去的推测则要用”must+have+过去分词” 的表达法，如：The lights have gone out.A fuse must haveblown. 而对过去的否定推测则多用“ cant +have+过去分词” ， 如： I dorft thinkhe can have heard you. Call again. 误 We could not help to laugh at once. 正 We could not help laughing at once. 正 We could not help but laugh at once. 析couk

626、irft help+动名词” 表示禁不住做了某事。 但could not help but与couldnot but后面要加不带to 的不定式，意思都是不得不去做某事. 如：You could not(help) but respect him.can be able tocan与be able to都可以用来表示能力，但 can只有现在时与过去时，be able to则可用任何时态，如：He will be able to teach the child.但要表示经过努力而达到的一次性动作则只能用 be able to ,如： He finally was able to jump over

627、 2 10meters,或：The plane was able to fly over the mountain. 但要注意的是这两个词都没有进行时态，而 be able to后面不接不定式的被动态。can couldcan与could都可以用在现在时的口语中， 只是用could更为礼貌， 语气更委婉。如：Could you tell us a story?carenJnJnJnJnJ误正误正析rLrLrLrLrLI dont care coffee.I dont care for coffee.Take care for your steps.Take care of your steps

628、.care for是” 对某物感兴趣” ，而 care of是” 关心, 要当心某事 ，如：Shedidnt care for him. Take care ot what you are doing. 误 I dont care where we will go if it doesnt rain. 正 I dont care where we go if it doesnt rain.change 误 I want to change my camera with that one. 正 I want to change my camera for that one. 析 change f

629、or为 以某物为交换物” 。而 change with则是 随. . .而变” , 如:The woods colour changed with the season.cheap 误 A teachers salary is generally very cheap. 正 A teachers salary is generally very low. 析 工资的高低要用low, cheap是指价格便宜，如果要讲物美价廉则要用not expensive, 如： This car is not expensive.choose 误 We each had to have a choose of

630、 A or B. 正 We each had to have a choice of A or B. 析 choice是名词，而 choose是动词。class 误 The class is watching TV. 正 The class are watching TV. 析 class作主语时，如果作为整体讲则应用单数形式的谓语动词，如：Theclass was more than forty in number.如考虑到具体的每个成员时则应用复数形式的谓语动词，如：The class are, in general, very bright.clean 误 Sorry, I didnt

631、bought it here. I cleanly forgot. 正 Sorry, I didnt bought it here. I clean forgot. 析 clean可以作为副词讲，其意为“ 完全“ ，而 cleanly则意为“ 正 确 地 ”干净利落地” ，如：The knife doesnt cut cleanly.而 clean作为形容词讲时意为”清洁的“ 、” 干净的” , 如 ：Her face is not clean now.clever 误 Im not clever in English. 正 Im not clever at English. 析 clever

632、 at是固定搭配，表示在某方面有特长。close 误 It is cold outside. Please keep the door close. 正 It is cold outside. Please keep the door closed. 析这里的close是动词， 意为” 关闭 ， 而 ke叩后要加形容词， 所以要用close的过去分词形式closed作形容词。作形容词用的close意为“ 近的“ 、“ 亲密的” 。 误 Come closely so that I can see you. 正 Come close so that I can see you. 误 Good t

633、eaching and good testing are close related. 正 Good teaching and good testing are closely related. 析 close,closely同样可以作副词用，但其意义不同， close是“ 靠近“ 、” 接近” 之意，而closely则是“ 紧密“ 、“ 严密” 、“ 密切” 之意。 误 My school was quite close from my home. 正 My school was quite close to my home. 析 呜 . . . 接近” 是 close to，例如：He w

634、as close to fifty.There is a bus stop close to the station.close shut turnshut与 close是同义词，如close the door或 shut the door.但要讲把某人关在门外时则只能用shut somebody out而不能用close,因shut语气较强，并含有隔离之意。而 tum off是指关上电视、电灯、煤气之类，有切断之意。cloth 误 The children wear very good cloth to go to school. 正 The children wear very good

635、clothes to go to school. 误 I need a lot of clothing.Im going to make a new cloth. 正 I need a lot of cloth.Im going to make a new dress. 析 cloth是“ 布“ 、“ 布料 ，没有复数形式。一块布料是a piece of cloth,而clothes统指衣服，是复数名词，” 一套衣服” 要讲a suit of clothes,如果是 一件件衣服” 应讲shirt, dress, sweater等。而 clothing是衣物的总称，是不可数名词。例如：This

636、clothing is needed in warm countries.Her clothes are made of fine cloth.英语中的dress是指比较正式的服装， 如a school dress（ 校服） , a student dress（ 学生套装） ，a working dress（ 工作服） 。coffee 误 Please give me two waters. 正 Please give me two coffees. 正 Please give me two cups of water. 析 虽然coffee, water, tea等都是物质名词,但是只有co

637、ffee可用coffees取代若干杯coffee,而其他的却不行，其前要加a cup of或 a glass of.colour(color) 误 Colours of flowers are red, yellow and white. 正 Flowers are red, yellow and white. 析 中文的“ 花的颜色有红色、黄色和白色” ，若译为英文Colours of flowersa r e - ,就显得重复了。 误 I like green colour. 正 I like green. 正 I like colour green. 析 colour green中的co

638、lour是 green的同位语，所以这种说话方式英语是可以接受的。come 误 I came across with an old friend in the street yesterday. 正 I came across an old friend in the street yesterday. 析come across是 偶然碰见、 遇见” , 要直接加宾语， 如： Pve just come acrossa beautiful poem in this magazine. 误 Where do you come from?I come from the station. 正 Whe

639、re did you come from?I came from the station. 正 Where do you come from?I come from China. 析 Where do you come from?意为 你是什么地方的人? ” 而 Where did youcome from?则是 你从何处来? ” 误 The stars are coming out from the cloud. 正 The stars are coming out of the cloud. 析 come out of意为” 从. . . 地方出来” 。come in come into

640、entercome in与come into的意义相同，但 come into后面要加宾语，而come in后面不用宾语。 如 I found someone came into my room. The door opened and the childcame in.enter 常作为及物动词使用，如：The bus entered the English tunnel.congratulate 误 I want to congratulate you for your success with all my heart. 正 I want to congratulate you on y

641、our success with all my heart. 析 动词congratulate somebody on something是 向某人祝贺某事其名词congratulation 在用时一般要用复数，如：I offered him my congratulations on his_IJ-IJnJst误正误正析o1 1111 1rLFLcsuccess.又如：Congratulations!cook 误 My father is a good cooker. 正 My father is a good cook. 析很爹动词加上er则变为执行该动作的一种人， 如work worke

642、r,teachteacher.但 cook即是动词 做饭 ，同时名词也是“ 厨师 。而 cooker则是 厨具 、 炊具 之意。 如： I will cook the dinner. I bought a good press cooker（ 高压锅） 。corner 误 There is a post office in the corner of the street. 正 There is a post office at the corner of the street. 误 A girl sat at the corner of the room. 正 A girl sat in t

643、he corner of the room. 析 in the comer是在建筑物内部的角上，而 at the comer是在外部的角上，如： There is a big tree at the corner of the building.I cost ten dollars for the book.I spent ten dollars on the book.I cost two hours to do my homework.It took me two hours to do my homework.cost, spend, take都可以作“ 花费” 讲，但用法不同。cost

644、的用法是“something+cost+somebody+时间或金钱 ， 如： The book cost me ten dollars, spend的用法是“ somebody+spend+时间+（ in） doing something,如： I spent two hours （ in）writing this book.或“ somebody+spend+金钱+on something*, 如：I spend twodollars on this book.而 take 的用注则要用逻辑主语 it:”It+takes+somebody+时间+to do something1, 如：It

645、 took me an hour to clean the classroom.country 误 You can find cows in a country. 正 You can find cows in the country. 析 country即可作“ 国家” 讲，也可作“ 农村“ 讲。当作“ 农村“ 讲时，一定要加定冠词，而且只有单数形式。例如： 误 Farmers live in the countries. 正 Farmers live in the country. 析 但作为“ 国家” 讲时则可有单、 复数形式， WUn： Japan is an Asian country

646、.Japan, China, and India are Asian countries.另外，country 一般指的是地理概念上的国家，如： New Zealand is an agricultural country.而 nation 多指民族组成的国家，如 : The Chinese nation（ 中华民族） 。state多侧重于政权方面的区域、国家范围，如：the state farm（ 国营农场） 。cross 误 There are traffic lights at the cross. 正 There are traffic lights at the crossing.

647、析cross作为名词讲时是十字架、 十字形的东西， 如： Red Cross（ 红十字会） 。nJnJnJ误正析rLrLrLThe little boy is going to across the street.The little boy is going to cross the street,across是副词或介词，但不能作动词用。cross passcross是指横过某地， 如： He crossed the square.而 pass则强调从某物体旁经过,如：I mailed some letters when I passed the post office.crowd 误 T

648、he room soon was crowded by people. 正 The room soon was crowded with people. 析 crowded在这句话中应作为形容词，所以这句话不是被动语态而是系表结构， 如：The room was crowded with books.cup 误 A silver glass was given to the winner. 正 A silver cup was given to the winner. 误 My mother was looking for the whisky cup. 正 My mother was loo

649、king for the whisky glass. 析 glass一般指由玻璃制成的器皿，而 cup多指用陶瓷或金属制成的杯子,且 cup尤其用在奖杯上。 喝酒多用的是玻璃制成的杯子， 如我们讲I drink a glassof wine at supper. 而不讲 I drink a cup of wine at supper.Ddance 误 We*ll invite you and your wife to a dance party. 正 Well invite you and your wife to a dancing party. 正 Well invite you and

650、your wife to a dance. 正 Well invite you and your wife to a ball.（ 美语中常用 ball 作为舞会。）date 误 He studied ten hours a date. 正 He studied ten hours a day. 析 date是指具体日期。如 问 Whats the date today?应回答具体日期：October 1st 1998.nM day 是指 1 0 （ 24 小时） 。 如 What day is today?问的是星期几，应回答Its Sunday.” 误 Todays date is Jan

651、uary first. 1998. 正 Todays date is January 1, 1998. 正 Today* date is January 1st, 1998. 析 在日期书写中不要用序数词全写，而要用1st, 2nd, 3rd如果一定要用序数词，其顺序应为：It is the first of January.day 误 This is a book about every day English. 正 This is a book about everyday English. 正 This is an everyday English book. 误 We go to sc

652、hool everyday. 正 We go to school every day. 析 everyday是形容词，意为“ 日常的“ ，而 every day则是“ 每天“ 、“ 天天”/ 总 、Odead 误 My father has died for ten years. 正 My father has been dead for ten years. 析 die是瞬间动词，它可以用于完成时，如：My father has died, 但用于完成时不能与表示一段时间的状语连用。 它也可以用于过去时， 如： My father diedthree years ago 误 Well alw

653、ays remember the deads who were killed in the war. 正 Well always remember the dead who were killed in the war. 析 形容词前如加定冠词表示一类人，如 the rich（ 富人） ，the sick（ 病人） ， thepoor（ 穷人） ，其后的谓语动词要用复数，如：The rich are not always happy.dead deadlydead在某些词组里是“ 完全“ 、 的确” 的意思，如dead right, dead tired, dead sure。而 deadly

654、 则是“ 致命的 ， 如： The rich man had many deadly enemies.又如: Canceris a deadly disease.dead dieddead是形容词，如：Mrs Ginty was dead.而 died是动词die的过去式及过去分词， 如： She died in 1960. 但英语中如表达出对某人去世的伤感说法是pass away,如： My father passed away, this morning.deer 误 In the zoo, there are many deers. 正 In the zoo, there are man

655、y deer. 析deer是单、 复数同形的词， 如： one deer, two deer,这样的名词还有fish,sheep等。但如果讲There are many fishes here.这句话应译为 这里有许多种鱼类。” 而不应译为” 这里有很多鱼。”desk 误 The boy sat in his desk. 正 The boy sat at his desk. 析 在课桌旁坐着应用介词a t,而 at desk则应译为“ 在学习“ ，at table应译为“ 在吃饭” 。nJnJ-IJnJnJ_IJ_IJ_IJnJnJnJnJnJ_IJ_IJue误正误正析误正误正析误正析误正正l

656、erLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLrLdIn South Africa many people died from cancer.In South Africa many people died of cancer.The old man died of overwork.The old man died from overwork.死于疾病应用die o f ,而死于某种外因事故则多用from.His mother is died.His mother is dead.The old woman was dead at the age of seventy.The

657、 old woman died at the age of seventy.dead是形容词，而 die是动词。形容词表示状态，动词则表示动作。He died in a traffic accident.He was killed in a traffic accident.由于事故而造成的死亡一般用to be killed.When the doctor came, the old man had already died.When the doctor came, the old man was already dead.The old man died before the doctor

658、 came.different 误 My room is different with yours. 正 My room is different from yours. 误 The village is very different with what it was. 正 The village is very different from what it was. 析 different from是“ 与. . .不同” 之意。difficult 误 English is very difficult to be learned. 正 English is very difficult t

659、o learn. 误 He learned physics is difficult. 正 It is very difficult for him to learn physics. 析 要学习英语的表达法而不要生硬地按字去译中文。It is difficult forsomebody to do something.为 对于某人来说做某事很困难。”difficulty 误 There was little difficulty to find him. 正 There was little difficulty in finding him. 析 这种用法还有 trouble,即 diff

660、iculty (trouble) in doing something.dinner 误 When did you have the supper? 正 When did you have supper? 析 英语中一日三餐前无冠词，例如： 误 I had a lunch at 12 oclock. 正 I had lunch at 12 oclock. 析在某些特定场合， 如指某次宴会， 则要加冠词， 如： The dinner was givenin honour of the guest.dress 误 My father bought a new dress for himself y

661、esterday. 正 My father bought a new suit for himself yesterday. 析 一般来讲男套装用su it,女服则用dress；作男服的服装店是tailor shop(tailofs),而做女装的服装店是dressmaker. 误 The mother dressed the clothes on her child. 正 The mother dressed her child. 析 dress作及物动词当“ 穿衣服” 讲时, 其后不能接衣服而只能接人，如：The boy is still too young to dress hims61f

662、.但作为一种穿着打扮的状态时，则多用其过去分词作形容词，如：He is not dressed in his new suit, 或 She is dressed inred.词组 dress up 是过节日时应服装整齐, 如：They dressed up for the holiday,dress have on put on wear要区别这几个动词需分清是表示动作的动词还是表示状态的动词。表示状态的动词是 have on 和 wear, 如：He has on a white coat. He was wearing heavy shoes.而 put on 则表示穿衣的动作, 如：P

663、ut on your coat,it is cold outside, ffn dress 即可以作状态又可以作动作，作动作讲时其后面接人而不能接衣服，作穿着状态时贝 I 多用 dressed 的形式。 如： I saw a lady dressed in red. I saw a girl dressing herself.drop 误 The students fell their voice. 正 The students dropped their voice. 析 drop与 fall都可以表示“ 落下、掉下” 之意，有时可以互换，如：Thedictionary fell (drop

664、ped) from the table.但 drop 还可以作及物动词，而 fall 一般只能作不及物动词。 误 I shall drop in you. 正 I shall drop in on you. 析 drop in是随便拜访某人，而其后要接人时应加介词on再加人称。during 误 D uring I was sick, I couldnt eat well. 正 While I was sick, I couldnt eat well. 析 during后不能接从句，而 when和 while后可接从句。 误 I have been studying English during

665、 three days. 正 I have been studying English for three days. 析 during不能表达一个动作持续多长的时间， 而只能表达在某段时间内某事件的发生。即带有由during引导的时间状语的句子只能用过去时，不能用完成时。Eeach 误 Every of them has his habit. 正 Each of them has his habit. 析 each可以作形容词，但也可作代词，而 every只能作形容词。 误 The manager comes to America almost each month. 正 The manag

666、er comes to America almost every month. 析 each与every都作形容词讲时，都有“ 每个” 之意，但有不同。each多指个体，而 every 则多指整体。如：We want every student to succeed, each 不同来表达总体概念，所以不能与almost, nearly, likely等词连用。 误 We each has a book. 正 We each have a book. 析 each作同位语时，其数应与其同位的名词相同，而 each作主语时则应取其单数形式。each other one anothereach o

667、ther与one another这两个词组的区别在很多语法书中强调each other是两者之间， 而 one another是多者之间， 其实不然， 如： AH students must care for eachother, must love and help each other.事实上这两个词组是同义的， 如果要讲有什么区别的话，当我们非常笼统地谈，而不特指什么人时，多用。 ne another.early 误 Could you come here more early? 正 Could you come here earlier? 析单音节和少数双音节副词的比较级和最高级要用e

668、r和est来作其结尾，如 fast, soon, early, hard, long, near 等。earth 误 What on the earth do you mean? 正 What on earth do you mean? 析 on earth这一词组在句中为的是加强语气，其意为“ 究竟“ 、“ 到底 。而作为“ 地球” 讲时则要加定冠词，如：How far is the earth from the moon.而作为”泥土” 讲时则为不可数名词，如：He filled the pot with earth and wanted to plantsome flowers.easy

669、 误 You can easy imagine my surprise. 正 You can easily imagine my surprise. 析 easy只在有限的词组中雇用作副词，如take it easy （ 不要紧张） ， go easy,stand easy 等。例如： Easy come, easy go. （ 钱来的容易花的也快. ） Easier said thandone.（ 说的容易做着难。）east 误 Japan is on the east of China. 正 Japan is to the east of China. 析 在讲述地理位置时，有 3 个介词

670、常用，它们是in, on和to ,其中in表示处于所表达的范围之内， 如： Shanghai is in the east of China, on则表示双方接壤，如： North Korea is on the northeast of China.而表示互不相接的两部分时则用to,如： Taiwan is to the east of Fujian.either 误 I dont like opera.-I dont like too. 正 -I donMike opera.-I dont like either. 析 在否定句中用either表示“ 也” ，而在肯定句中用too表示“ 也

671、” 。 误 Either you or I are right. 正 Either you or I am right. 析 这在语法书中被称作就近原则，即哪个主语离谓语动词近， 则应采用与哪个主语相一致的谓语动词，相同用法的还有neithernor，not onlybutalso-,以及 or 在连接两个主语时。如：You or he is to go home. The others willhave to stay in the classroom.elder 误 My older brother has gone to Shanghai. 正 My elder brother has

672、gone to Shanghai. 析 在表示兄姐的长幼时应用elder表示“ 哥哥姐姐 ，如：my elder sister姐，但表示岁数时则多用older,如：She is two years older than I.empty 误 Are these seats empty? 正 Are these seats taken? 析 empty是指空洞的没有任何物体，如：The house was empty,其意思是没有任何家具或屋内无人。但座位是否有人坐应用take.English 误 My sister studied English language very well. 正 My

673、 sister studied the English language very well. 正 My sister studied English very well. 析 在泛指某一种学科时，不应加冠词，如：I like history.但如特指某一门学科时则应加冠词，如：He likes the history of America.enjoy 误 I enjoy to play football. 正 I enjoy playing football. 析 enjoy后要接动名词，而不接不定式。 误 D id you enjoy at the English evening? 正 D

674、 id you enjoy yourself at the English evening?enough 误 Im sorry. You are not studying enough carefully. 正 Im sorry. You are not studying carefully enough. 析 enough要用在形容词或副词之后。 误 D o you have enough of money? 正 D o you have enough money? 正 D o you have enough of the money? 误 The coffee isnt enough. 正

675、 There isnt enough coffee. 析 enough可以作be动词的表语， 但其主语应是代词， 如： Thafs enough. Itwas enough. 如果是名词时应换用上面的句型。entrance 误 The entrance of the cinema is on your right. 正 The entrance to the cinema is on your right. 析 在表示通往某处时entrance后亩多用to作介词。 这样的用法还有key tothe door, answer to the question 等。evening 误 I walke

676、d home in a cold evening. 正 I walked home on a cold evening. 析 in the evening这一词组如加上另外的修饰词则其介词应换为on.everyone 误 Everyone of you goes to class. 正 Every one of you goes to class. 析 everyone其后不能接of结构。在否定句中如果要讲” 每一个人都没有注意到它” ， 就译作：Nobody noticed it.要注意 Every one of us is not right.应译为“ 我们不都对。” 而 None of

677、us are right.才应译为“ 我们全错了。”exam 误 We take part in an exam. 正 We take an exam. 析 take part in为“ 参加” 某种活动，运动，而在学科中选择某一学科学习并进行考试应用take.except 误 The room is clean except two desks. 正 The room is clean except fbr two desks. 误 I come here every day except fbr Sunday. 正 I come here every day except Sunday.e

678、xercise 误 The students exercise spoken English in the morning. 正 The students practise spoken English in the morning. 析 exercise多指运动、训练，而practise则多指把理论付诸于实践的练习。 误 Everyone should do exercises every day. 正 Everyone should do exercise every day. 析 作为运动讲exercise是不可数名词，而当“ 练习“ 、“ 体操“ 、“ 早操” 则是可数名词，例如：Id

679、o a lotexercises in the P.E. class.fail 误 Tom failed his exam. 正 Tom failed in his exam. 正 Tom failed to pass the exam. 析 fail为不及物动词，其后可用in加名词，或直接接不定式。family 误 Im sorry I have to go. Toms families are waiting for me. 误 Fm sorry I have to go. Toms family is waiting for me. 正 Fm sorry I have to go. To

680、ms family are waiting for me. 析 family是集合名词， 把它当作整体看它是单数，如看作家庭中的每个成员则为复数。如：Your family are very kind to me. My family is very large.far 误 My school is ten miles far from here. 正 My school is ten miles away from here. 析 far一般不与实际距离连用。 误 D id you walk far?Yes, I walked far.n 正 D id you walk far?”“Yes,

681、 I walked a long way. 析 一般肯定句中不用far单独作状语，而用alongway.far组成的常用词组有：as far a s.远至，一直到。如：He walked as far as the station.就. . .而言。 如： As far as he was concerned these books were very good. 只要。 如： I canhelp you as far as I can. so for 至 U 目前为止。 例：He is very well so far.farther furtherfar有两个比较级，即farther和 f

682、urther,其意思略有不同：farther主要用于表示距离的远近， 如： Milan is farther away than Rome.而 further 则是指“ 进一步的” ，如： Will we need any further discussion on this matter.fast 误 A fast train runs fastly. 正 A fast train runs fast. 析 fast其形容词与副词形式相同。fast soonfast指行动本身的速度快， 如： The foreigner speaks too fast.而 soon则多指两个动作之间间隔短，时

683、间到来的迅速，如 I： She will come soon.feel 误 I feel badly about my mistakes. 正 I feel bad about my mistakes. 析 感观动词如feel, smell等后面要接形容词而不是副词。feel good是指某人精神好，而 feel well是指人身体状况良好。 误 I try not to hurt her feeling. 正 I try not to hurt her feelings. 析 feeling在作“ 感情” 讲时要用复数， 而作“ 感觉” 讲则要用单数。如： I havea feeling t

684、hat we will win the game.few 误 Few of them is very good. 正 Few of them are very good. 析 few意为“ 几乎没有” ， 但要用复数谓语动词。 如果讲有一些人应用a few,如： There were only a few people in the street. 误 There are less farms than there used to be. 正 There are fewer farms than there used to be. 析 few的比较级为fewer,其后接可数名词；而 littl

685、e的比较级为less,其后接不可数名词。field 误 He is a famous scientist on the field of physics. 正 He is a famous scientist in the field of physics. 析 in the field是“ 在田野上” 或是“ 在某一学科领域内” ，而on the field则多指” 在 战 场 上 如 ：He lost his life on the battle field.fill 误 She filled orange into my glass. 正 She filled my glass with

686、 orange. 析表示要用某种物品装满某容器时要用fill with词组， 如： The boy ran backhome filled with joy.fill fullfill是动词，但有及物与不及物两种用法，当表示“ 充满” 之意时是不及物动词，应用 fill w ith,如：The little girFs eyes filled with tears.而当表示” 使. . .装满某物 时， 是及物动词， 如： He filled his pocket with books.而 be filled with 应看作系表结构，如： The boy*s mother was fille

687、d with anger, full 是形容词， 要用 be fullof 这一词组，如：The boy was full of joy.find 误 He has finded his lost bike. 正 He has found his lost bike. 析 find是不规则动词，其过去式和过去分词均是foundo 但 found 一词又意为“ 建立 ，它是规则动词，其过去式及过去分词均为founded. 误 It is very difficult to look for a suitable job. 正 It is very difficult to find a suit

688、able job. 析 look for为“ 寻找“ ，而 find是找到。寻找工作并不难，难的应是找到合适的工作。find find outfind out 意为 找出、算出、发现 ，如：I have found out how to do it.而 find 的主要侧重点在找到某物，如：I find my book under the desk.finish 误 I finished to read that book last night. 正 I finished reading that book last night. 析英文中有些动词其后只能用动名词作宾语而不能用不定式作宾语，

689、这样的动词在中考范围内有两个，即finish和 enjoyofire 误 Theres no smoke without a fire. 正 Theres no smoke without fire. 析 此句应译为中文” 无风不起浪 。fire作为物质名词“ 火” 讲时为不可数名词, 而作为“ 炉火“ 、 “ 火灾” 讲则是可数名词， 如： There was a fire in the next streetlast month.如要讲“ 着火了 要用 be on fire,如：The factory wason fire. 误 The man fired to us. 正 The man

690、 fired at us. 析fire (on) at均指” 向某目标开火” ， at用于较小目标， 而on用于较大目标。first 误 Is this your firstly visit to Beijing? 正 Is this your first visit to Beijing? 析 除了在强调第一、第二、第三等场合中有时还可见firstly 一词外，这个词已不多见, 而均被first取代。first还有“ 首先“ 、“ 首次“ 、“ 第一次” 之意。follow 误 I received a letter which ran as follow. 正 I received a l

691、etter which ran as follows. 析 as follows是惯用法，其意为“ 如下” ，不论在任何场合均要用follows. 误 As follows are his arguments. 正 The following are his arguments. 析 as follows主要用于句尾，而the following则用于句首。food 误 Too much sweet food, such as cakes, chocolates,pastry , may increase yourweight. 正 Too many foods, such as cakes,

692、 chocolates,pastry may increase yourweight. 析 food泛指食物时为不可数名词，如：There is no food for supper.而指一种种食物时则用作可数名词。foot 误 There is a five feet wide bridge. 正 There is a five foot wide bridge. 析 用连字符组成的形容词中所有名词均要用单数形式。 误 We went to college on feet. 正 We went to college on foot. 析 b y 后面加接交通工具时，不应加任何冠词，不要用名词

693、的复数形式。如加了某些修饰词后， 其前面的介词要作适当的改变， 如： I came to school in hiscar yesterday. I go to shool on a train.for 误 I wanted to go to the pub for having a drink. 正 I wanted to go to the pub for a drink. 正 I wanted to go to the pub to have a drink. 析 用 for表示目的时，其后面只能接名词，而不要接动名词。 误 I went to the office for seeing

694、 the headmaster. 正 I went to the office to see the headmaster. 析 用不定式来表示动作的目的。 误 I will leave Beijing to Shanghai. 正 I will leave Beijing fbr Shanghai. 正 I will leave fbr Shanghai. 析 leave for为一固定搭配，不要改动。 误 I bought a book to you. 正 I bought a book for you. 误 He is a friend fbr us. 正 He is a friend

695、to us. 析 在英文中“ 为“ 一词在泛指时用t。 ， 在特指时要用for. 误 This food is good to us. 正 This food is good for us. 析 词组be good (bad) fo r表示” 对. . . 有好( 坏) 处” 。 误 For I was feeling quite hungry, I wanted to have lunch. 正 I wanted to have lunch, fbr I was feeling quite hungry. 析 for作为“ 因为“ 讲时一般不要置于句首，而且口气也比because弱的多。fo

696、rget 误 I left my key. 正 I left my key at home. 正 I forgot my key. 析 leave是“ 丢下” 之意，所以一定要接地点状语，而 forget是“ 忘记 ，所以不用接地点状语。 误 I will not forget the rules. 正 I will never forget the rules. 误 Please dont forget posting my letter on your way home. 正 Please don*t forget to post my letter on your way home. 析

697、 要注意 forget to do something 为 忘了去作某事 ，而 forget doingsomething则应译为” 对已经作过的事记不起来了 。如：He forget returning thebook to the library.应译为“ 他忘记已把书还给图书馆这件事了。” 同样用法的词还有 remember 和 regret.free 误 You can speak free in front of my parents. 正 You can speak freely in front of my parents. 析 free作为副词时意为“ 免费“ 、“ 不必付款

698、，如：You can eat free in myrestaurant.而 freely则意为咱 由地 、“ 无限制地” 。French 误 She comes from French. 正 She comes from France. 析 French是“ 法语“ 、“ 法国的“ ，而 France才是“ 法国” 。friend 误 He nodded to me friendly. 正 He nodded to me in a friendly fashion. 析 friendly是形容词，不是副词。在英语中应避免讲He is a friend of mymother.又比如：I go

699、to school with my friend.从语法上讲是对的但不是习惯上英语的说法。而应讲 He is a friend of my mothers. I go to school with a friend. befriends with 则是“ 交朋友” 之意，例如: I hope you will be friends with m e.而不应讲 I hope you will be my friend.交朋友还有一惯用法是 make friends.from 误 Where do you come from? I come from the library. 正 Where do

700、 you come from? I come from England. 正 Where did you come from? I came from the library. 析 Where do you come from?应意为“ 你是从什么国家（ 地方） 来的? ” （ 即意为”你是哪的人? ） 而 Where did you come from?才是 你刚刚从哪来? ”front 误 There are three tall trees in the front of my house. 正 There are three tall trees in front of my hous

701、e. 析 in front of是某物体外部的前面，而 in the front of是在某物体内部的前面。如：The bus driver is seated in the front of the bus.game 误 He went to America to take part in the Olympic Game. 正 He went to America to take part in the Olympic Games. 析 game作为“ 运动会” 讲时应用其复数形式，而具体一个游戏则可用其单数形式。如：Our school team won the game.German

702、误 They are Germen. 正 They are Germans. 误 She comes from German. 正 She comes from Germany. 析 German是“ 德国人“ 、“ 德国的” 、“ 德语” , 其复数形式是Germans；而Germany才是德国。gather 误 All the students and teachers are gathered together now. 正 All the students and teachers are gathered now. 析 用了动词gather就不要再用together 了。这句话还可以

703、这样讲：All thestudents and teachers got together.give 误 She gives up to look for the lost bike. 正 She gives up looking for the lost bike. 析 give up意为“ 放弃” ，其后只接动名词作介词宾语，而不应接不定式。glad 误 His parents were very glad for his success in business. 正 His parents were very glad of his success in business. 正 His

704、parents were very glad to know his success in business. 析 ” 为. . . 感到高兴” 应是 be glad of something 或 be glad to do something.glass 误 The old teacher has two pair of big glass. 正 The old teacher has two pairs of big glasses. 析 glass作为“ 眼镜” 讲，应用复数形式，在英语中手套gloves裤子pants,剪刀scissors均用复数形式。 glass作“ 玻璃杯” 讲时则

705、可用单数形式或复数形式，如：I want two glasses of milk.而作为物质名词“ 玻璃” 讲则要用作不可数名词，如： The boy broke two panes of glass.g。 误 -Mary, could you come to my home now? -Yes, Tm going. 正 -Mary, could you come to my home now?-Yes, Im coming. 析 g o 是指离开说话人所在地，而 come指的是朝向说话人的方向：如：Come here!Can I come and help you?但在口语中也有一些例外，如

706、表示要参加到某人或者某件活动时常用 come,如：We are going to have a party tonight. Wouldyou like to come with us?gone beenHe has gone to Shanghai.指此人已去上海不在此地了。He has been to Shanghai.指此人去过上海现已回来了。gold 误 She brushed her gold hair carefully. 正 She brushed her golden hair carefully. 析 gold 作形容词指“ 金质的” , 如 ：a gold ring, a

707、gold coin,而 golden 是金色的 ，如：golden age（ 金色的时代） , 但 “ 金鱼” 例外，为gold fish。good 误 IVe been waiting for good twenty minutes. 正 Ive been waiting fbr a good twenty minutes. 析 a good之意为“ 足足“ 、“ 整整” 之意。good wellHe is good.应译为“ 他是个好人。 ” 而He is well.应译为” 他身体不错。 1 feel good.即精神状态良好，而 I feel well. 即身体状况不错。 误 This

708、 food is very good to you. 正 This food is very good for you. 析 be good for是 对. . .有利、有好处” ,而 be good to是指 对待某人不错” ，如： Your friend is very good to me.grade 误 -What grade are you in? -Im in grade 1. 正 -What grade are you in? -Fm in Gread 1. 析当泛指那一年级时grade的头一个字母小写， 当有具体数字时则要大写。Hhad belternJnJnJnJnJnJ误正

709、析误正析rLrLrL_LrLrLYou have better hurry.You had better hurry.had better只用过去时h a d ,不要误用成现在时have。You hadnt better worry.You had better not worry.had better后面加不带to 的不定式， 其否定式是“ had better not+动词原形half 误 I had driven about half mile. 正 I had driven about half a mile. 析 半小时” 有两种讲法half an hour, a half hour

710、.而 一个半小时” 应讲anhour and a half 或 one and a half hours.“半天” 应讲 half a day, “ 半镑” 应讲 half apound. 但要尽量避免使用half a year,而应用six months；不用half a month,而用 two weeks 或 fifteen days. 误 Half us could go to the park. 正 Half of us could go to the park. 析 half用于名词前可用of结构也可不用of结构，但用于代词前则必须加ofo 如： More than half （

711、of） my classmates are boys. 误 One and half apples are left on the table. 正 One and half apples is left on the table. 析 一个半one and half后面的名词要用复数，而句中的谓语动词却要用单数。 误 Half of the work are done. 正 Half of the work is done. 误 Half of the six apples is red. 正 Half of the six apples are red. 析 “half of+名词” 这一

712、结构后面的谓语动词应与of后面的名词相一致，如为不可数名词或可数名词单数，要用单数谓语动词；而复数名词后面要加与复数相对应的谓语动词。hand 误 He shook hand with his teacher. 正 He shook hands with his teacher. 析 与某人握手要用shake hands.与 hand有关的词组中有很多要用复数形式, 如： change hands （ 转手、易手） ， in the hands of （ S 控制） ， join hands （ 与人合作） 。happen 误 What was happened to you last mon

713、th? 正 What happened to you last month? 误 An accident was happened in this street last night. 正 An accident happened in this street last night. 析 在英语中不及血动词没有被动态，作为“ 发生” 讲 的 happen, take place和 break out都不具有被动态。happen to常用来表达一件偶然密生的事，如：Ifyou happen to meet my sister please ask her to call me.hard 误 I

714、have to study hardly. 正 I have to study hard. 析 hard是形容词，如：a hard w ork,但它同时也是副词。hardly是 hard的又一副词形式，但词意截然不同，意为” 几乎不二 误 I had my leg broken last term, so I couldn*t hardly study at all. 正 I had my leg broken last term so I hardly studied at all.吨 hardly意为 否定 ，所以不要再加否定词语了，如果hardly用于句首则应采用倒装语序，如：Hardl

715、y had he arrived when she started complaining.have 误 I had my boy do his homework from morning till noon. 正 I had my boy doing his homework from morning till noon. 析 用 have somebody do something 还是 doing something 要取决句子的意思和句中的时间状语。 误 I have my bike to repair. 正 I have my bike repaired. 析 have someth

716、ing done这一句型是让某事被别人去作，请看下面两句意义的不同：I have repaired my bike.（ 我自己已修好了自行车。） 而 I have my bikerepaired.（ 我把车推出去让别人修理了。） 误 Could you give me some money if you have. 正 Could you give me some money if you have any. 析 ” 如果你有的话” 一句译为英文应加上any一词， ： I want some books ifthere is any.headache 误 Fve got headache. 正

717、 Ive got a headache. 析 Headache是一个规则的可数名词，所以可以讲: My mother often getsheadaches.但是“ 牙痛 toothache, 肚子痛stomache ache等却都可以用作不可数名词, 如：Ive got toothache. 但也可用作可数名词。hear 误 He was heard sing in the next room. 正 He was heard to sing in the next room. 析hear somebody do something这一句式用于被动语态时要把原来省略的不定式to还原回来。而在h

718、ear somebody doing something这一句式中则不会出现上述问题。如，主动态：I heard her singing in the next room.变为被动态时为：She was heard singing in the next room.这种用法还适用于 see, look, observe,watch, notice, listen to 等。hear listen tohear一词为听见了什么，或听到什么，强调其结果；而 listen to则强调有意要听，听的倾向。如：I want to listen to you, but I hear nothing.但词组

719、hear about (of)则为“ 听说过” 之意， 如： I heard about this. (我听说过此事。 )而 hear from 则为 收到某人信件” 之意：I often hear from my girl friend,help 误 Please help my homework. 正 Please help me do my homework. 正 Please help me with my homework. 析help其句型是help somebody do (to do) something.意为 帮某人作某事” ，但在较古老的语法中不带t o 的不定式表示句子的

720、主语参加这个动作，如：Hehelp his mother cook the m eal.即” 他和母亲一起作饭。” 而 He help me to do myhomework.则是” 他指导我做作业” 。 但在现代英语中这个区别则往往被取消了。所以带to与不带to 的不定式在句中意思相同，并无区别。 误 When I read the play I can*t help to think of my childhood. 正 When I read the play I can*t help thinking of my childhood. 析 can*t help doing someth

721、ing是 身不由己，情不自禁做某事” 。 误 Help yourself with some cakes. 正 Help yourself to some cakes. 析 中文亩讲 你自己拿蛋糕吃” ，英文中要用help somebody to something.here 误 Here the bus comes! 正 Here comes the bus! 析 副词在句首时一般要用倒装语序，即谓语动词的位置前移。 但是，若主语如是人称代词，则还是要用正常语序，如：Here we are!high 误 He is very high. 正 He is very tall. 析 英语中的两个

722、” 高“high和 ta ll,其中tall指人指物都是可以的，但 high则只指物体的高， 所以可以讲 This building is the highest building in the city.但 tall一般不用来指山脉的高低。hit 误 The mother got angry and hit the boy. 正 The mother got angry and beat the boy. 析 hit指打到某物之上，一般指一次性打击，如 He hit his head against thewall.（ 他把头撞到了墙上。） 而 beat则指多次性的打击。home 析home

723、此处用作副词, 所以不应加to ,又如： I arrived home at eleven thirtyyesterday evening. 而at home除了 “ 在家” 之意外，还有像” 在家里一样” 之意。如Make yourself at home.（ 不要拘束就像在家一样。）home house familyhome是指与亲人一起居住的地方，可以讲a letter from hom e,所以有人解释home包括住处和家人。 而 house的侧重点则在建筑物， 如Many new houses werebuilt this year, family 一词，作为整体讲其谓语动词用单数，

724、如：Her family is ahappy one.而作为家庭成员讲时要用复数谓语动词，如：My family are all likeswimming.homgwork 误 I have so many homework to do today. 正 I have so much homework go do today. 析 homework为不可数名词。同样的词还有work（ work作为“ 著作“ 、 作品工厂” 讲时为可数名词） ,fun, health information等。hope 误 I hope you to be a good student. 正 I hope yo

725、u will be a good student. 析 hope 一词不能接宾语再加上宾语补足语，但它可以接不定式作宾语，如： I hope to be a scientist.Tfo wish却可以接宾语加宾语补足语， 如： I wish you tobe a good student. 误 I don*t hope you will go to the park tomorrow. 正 I hope you wont go to the park tomorrow. 析hope和 think在否定句中的用法不同， 如 我认为你错了” 。 应译为： I dontthink you are r

726、ight.即否定在前。 而 hope则不能这样用。 又如在答语中” 我不这样认为 应译为 I dont think so, 或 I hope not. 误 I hope your help. 正 I hope for your help. 析 hope for为“ 期望某事发生“ ，虽然hope是及物动词，但表达期望某事情发生要用 hope for+名词” 这一结构。 误 I was hopeful to pass the exam. 正 I was hopeful of passing the exam. 析 对某事方有希望应用hopeful of （ about） +介词宾语” 这一结构。

727、hospital 误 My mother was in the hospital for two weeks. 正 My mother was in hospital for two weeks. 析 in hospital 为“ 住院就医 。ffi in （ at） the hospital 为 在医院（ 工作）如：He is a doctor in （ at） the hospital. 类似的用法还有很多, 如： “ 上学” 为 go to school,at school为“ 在校就读 ，go to bed为“ 上床睡觉” 。how 误 I want to know how to do

728、. 正 I want to know how to do it. 析how 是关联副词， 要注意与关联代词的不同用法。 如： I want to know whatto do. 误 How do you think about it? 正 What do you think about it? 析 英文中表达你对某事的看法如何应用What do you think about这一句式。hurry 析 请注意英语中的惯用法：” 快点吧，没时间了“ ，或“ 别着急还有一点时间。” 误 The car is hurrying through the street. 正 The car is rush

729、ing through! the street. 析 hurry 一词只用于人而不用于物体。hundred 误 There are two hundreds people here. 正 There are two hundred people here. 误 There are hundred of people here. 正 There are hundreds of people here. 析 hundred一词前如有数字时不论多少其后都不加s , 这和thousand（ 千）等数量词的用法一样，而 hundreds of是数百的，这一词组一定 要 加 s.hurt 误 I dont

730、 want to wound her feelings. 正 I dont want to hurt her feelings. 析 wound是指战场上的刀枪伤（ 名词） ，或用刀枪“ 伤害“ 、“ 打伤” （ 动词） 。if 误 If it will rain I wont go to school tomorrow. 正 If it rains I won*t go to school tomorrow. 析 由if引起的状语从句要用一般时表示将来。 误 I want to know if he comes here tomorrow. 正 I want to know if he wi

731、ll come here tomorrow. 析 if所引起的如果是宾语从句则不能用一般现在时表示将来。 误 I want to know if it will rain tomorrow he will come or not. 正 I want to know if it rains tomorrow he will come or not. 析 这里的i f 从句是整个宾语从句的条件状语，所以，还应用一般时表示将来。ill 误 He spent many years looking after his ill father. 正 He spent many years looking a

732、fter his sick father. 析 ill和 sick都可以作表语，如： Fm ill (sick).美国英语中常用s ic k ,而英国英语中两者都可用，但 ill 一般不作定语。in 误 In a cold morning, I went to school alone. 正 On a cold morning, I went to school alone. 析 在 in the morning或 in the afternoon词组中，不论在这两个名词的前或后加任何修饰词，其介词in都要变为on. 误 I will finish it after two days. 正 I

733、 will finish it in two days. 析中文中几天以后可以完成， 或几天后来取， 在译为英文时都不要用after,而要用 in.如： He will be back in a few days.in into作为副词应用in ,而不能用into,如： Come in, please.又若在句中不涉及到动词的位置，只是表达空间的位置时用i n ,如： The teacher in the office is mymother.但在 go, run, come, walk, dive 等词后则要用 into.如：She dives into theriver.instead 误

734、 The boy stayed in bed all day instead to go to school. 正 The boy stayed in bed all day instead of going to school. 析instead of其后要接动名词、 名词或代词， 而不能用不定式， 如：I choosethis book instead of that one. 误 The beer here is not good, so I drink wine instead of it. 正 The beer here is not good, so I drink wine in

735、stead. 析instead 是副词, 而 instead of 是介词短语。 如：If you are not free, you maycome another day instead.interest 误 He has a great interest for physics. 正 He has a great interest in physics. 误 He has some interest in many companies. 正 He has some interests in many companies. 析 interest作为“ 兴趣” 讲可用作不可数名词，但作为“

736、利息“ 、“ 股份“ 讲时为可数名词。 误 This is an interested book. 正 This is an interesting book. 析 修饰物时应用interesting,如，an interesting film ,而讲某人对某事感兴趣时要用过去分词interested,如： Fm interested in this play.但” 他是一个十分有趣的人” 。应译为He is an interesting m an.所以interesting是 令人感兴趣” 之意，而 interested则表示某人对某事物感兴趣，多用 be interested in som

737、ething这一句型。invent 误 America was invented by Christopher Columbus in 1492. 正 America was discovered by Christopher Columbus in 1492. 析invent 意为 发明唧从无到有， 如：Compass was invented by the Chinesepeople.而discover则意为“ 发现” 。it 误 That takes me ten years to finish this work. 正 It takes me ten years to finish t

738、his work. 析 it在这个句中的语法作用是形式主语， 而真正的主语是句子后面的不定式。有的句子要用it作形式主语或形式宾语，如： I think it difficult to learnEnglish well.join 误 D id you attend the football club? 正 D id you join the football club? 析 join经常用于参加某个团体、政党，并作为其中的一个成员；attend则重点强调出会议、 到场， 而不一定进行具体活动， 如：D id you attend the meetingyesterday?jTn take p

739、art in则强调参与某些具体活动或运动， 如： I take part in thefootball game.just 误 I have finished my work just now. 正 I finished my work just now. 析 just now意义“ 刚才” ，所以句中的谓语动词要用过去式。 误 Just I won the game. 正 I just won the game. 析just单独使用时不应放在句首， 而应放于be动词之后， 如：He is justa student, 名词与一般动词之间。 用在第一助动词之后，如： I have justre

740、turned home.但just与其他词组成词组时，如just now, just then,则可用于句首和句尾。如： Just then he saw the bus coming.just justlyjust常用于三种含意： 恰好， 如：Its just five oclock. 仅仅， 相当于only,如： I have just enough money to buy a dictionary. 不久前，如： I just missedmy old friend; He left a few minutes ago.而 justly 其意为“ 公正的 ，如： He wasjustl

741、y punished for his crimes.keep 误 She was keeping something to her father. 正 She was keeping something from her father. 析 对某人隐瞒某事 要用keep something from somebody”句型。 误 He kept to repeat the word again and again. 正 He kept repeating the word again and again. 析 keep doing something为连续不断地做某事。有时可以与keep on

742、 doingsomething互换。它们的区别在于keep doing something意为该动作一直不停地在进行中， 如： When the train started, she kept waving her hand.而 keep on doingsomething则表示该动作可能停停顿顿但却一直在进行中，如： He kept onmaking the same mistakes in grammar. 析这句话意为 我们必须赶上时代” , keep up with是“ 赶上” 之意， 而keep up则是“ 坚持下去” 的意思，如： Keep it up, dont stop now

743、!key 误 I lost the key of the door. 正 I lost the key to the door. 析 英语中讲某某的东西一般要用o f ,而 key, entrance, answer则多用to,如 I： ” 门的钥匙” 为 key to the door, ”高速公路入口 ” 为 entrance to the highway, ”问题的答案” 为 the answer (key) to the question.kind 误 This kind of books are not good. 正 This kind of books is not good.

744、析kind在这种句式中应作为主语， 如果讲Those kinds of books are very good.则是正确的。kind sort typekind和 sort为同义词，意为“ 种类 ，而 type则为“ 型号 ，如： What type of thiscar do you want?( 你想要这种车的什么型号? )knock 误 Someone was knocking the door. 正 Someone was knocking at the door. 析 knock 虽可以作及物动词，如： The car knocked a hole in the fence.但作“

745、敲门” 讲一定要用作不及物动词： knock at (on) the door.know 误 I want to know to play this game. 正 I want to know how to play this game. 析 要注意英语中在不定式前加疑问代词或疑问副词的用法。如：I want toknow how to do it / what to do / when to do it / where to go.know know ofI know him.为“ 我很了解他。” 而 I know of him .则为“ 我听说过他。 同样的用法还有hear和 hear

746、of这一词组。Llarge 误 He found a large number of mistake in his homework. 正 He found a large number of mistakes in his homework. 析na large number of + 复数名词” ，意为大量的。last 误 This is the newest news. 正 This is the latest news. 析 ” 最新消息” 应为latest new s,因为最晚到的新闻才是最新消息，请注意英语与汉语的区别。last the last 误 I saw my brothe

747、r the last week. 正 I saw my brother last week. 析 当谈到与目前有关的上月、 上星期等概念时只能用lastmonth,last week,而不能加定冠词，the last可用于表示一系列词的最后一个，如： That was thelast Christmas I spent at home.但 the last可以用来表示持续到现在的一个长时期，如： I am busy for the last week.late 误 Yesterday I went home lately. 正 Yesterday I went home late. 析 lat

748、e即可做形容词又可作副词； 而 lately则意为“ 最近的“ ， 如： I havenftseen her lately.late latter later latelylate有两个比较级，指时间较晚应用later,如口语中常讲： See you later.（ 一会见。 ） 而 latter则指按顺序讲的后者， 或靠后的， 其反意词为former, ： the formerpresident（ 前总统） 。又如： I can understand the latter part of the story.而 lately 则意为“ 近来“ 、“ 不久前 。laughed at by hi

749、s classmates.中的at是不可省掉的。laugh over则指“ 笑着谈论 某事， 如 We laugh over the film.（ 我们笑着谈论那个电影。）lay 误 We lied on the beach. 正 We lay on the beach. 析英文中有三个动词易混， 在考试中也频频出现， 它们的现在式， 过去式，过去分词以及现在分词是：lay （ vt , 放） laid laid layinglie（ vi , 躺） lay lain eyinglie（ vi , 说谎） lied lied lyinglearn 误 The teacher said： ”Yo

750、u must study this poem by heart. 正 The teacher said： ”You must learn this poem by heart. 析 study与 learn在作“ 学习“ 讲时，常常可以互换，但 learn侧重于学习成果或初级阶段的模仿性学习,如：The little baby is learning to walk.而 study则多侧重于学习的过程,如： Im studying at this college.而 learne,by heart 则是记住“ 、“ 背诵” 之意。leave 误 ril leave Beijing to Sha

751、nghai. 正 ril leave Beijing for Shanghai. 析 leave for 一词组为“ 去某地 ，如对话中常讲Ill leave for Shanghai.因所离开的地点是双方都知道的则可以省略。leave forget 误 Ive forgotten my homework at home. 正 Ive forgotten my homework. 正 Ive left my homework at home. 析 如果句中有地点状语则不要用forget,而要用leave.lesson 误 I have two lessons of English. 正 I h

752、ave two English lessons. 正 I have two lessons in English. 析 “ 我有两节英语课。” 这一表达法如上，但美国老师讲他有两节课时则多have two classes. teach somebody a lesson 为“ 教训某人“ ， 或“ 要吸取教训 , 如： Let this thing teaches you a lesson.lend 误 Please boiTow me your bike. 正 Please lend me your bike. 析borrow 是指“ 借入” ,如：I want to borrow some

753、 books from the library, lend是“ 借出 ，如： I can lend you my bike.而 keep 为“ 借多久 ： 如 How long canI keep it?less 误 He has fewer money than she has. 正 He has less money than she has. 析 16ss是 little的比益级，而 fewer是few的比较级。要注意前者修饰不可数名词，而后者修饰可数名词。let 误 The teacher lets the students clean the classroom as a punis

754、hment. 正 The teacher makes the students clean the classroom as a punishment. 析 虽然let, have, make有相同的用法，但 make和 have含有迫使某人做某事的意思。 误 Lets go to the park, will you? 正 Lets go to the park, shall we? 误 Let us go to the park, shall we? 正 Let us go to the park, will you? 析Lefs go的反意疑问句是shall we?而Let us go的

755、反意疑问句则是will you?life 误 Many people lost their life in the Second World War. 正 Many People lost their lives in the Second World War. 析 life作为“ 生命“ 、“ 性命” 时应为可数名词；当泛指一般“ 生活” 讲时则为不可数名词， 如：Which do you prefer, town life or country life?又如：Life is notall fun.light 误 There is a desk with a lit lamp on it.

756、 正 There is a desk with a lighted lamp on it. 析 light有两个过去分词： lighted和 l it ,当用过去分词作形容词当定语时只能用 lighted, light 可以用作名词用口: The moon gets its light from the sun.也可以作形容词，如： The classroom is very light.还可以作动词，如： The littlegirl lit a match.作形容词时还有“ 轻” 、 “ 浅” 等意， 如：This box is light. I like lightblue.like 误

757、 My sister is very as me. 正 My sister is very like me. 析 as 作为连词其后要接从句， 如： She is a good student as his brother usedto b e .而 like是介词，其后接宾语。 误 D o you like swimming with me tonight. 正 Would you like to swim with me tonight. 析 like作为动词当“ 喜欢” 讲时，其后面可接不定式也可接动名词，用不定式多表达一个一次性的动作，如： Pm sorry I donl like t

758、o go swimming tonight.用动名词则表示一个习惯性的动作，如： I like swimming very much.like alike作为形容词，alike 一般不作定语，而只作表语，如； The twins are very alike. 误 Would you like swimming with us? 正 Would you like to swim with us? 析 在 would you like这一句型中，其后面只能接不定式，而不能接动名词。 like的用法还要注意以下两点： He likes Tom.为“ 他喜欢汤姆。 ” Heis like Tom.为

759、“ 他像汤姆。 ” 第二句话的like为介词， 而第一句话的like为动词。listen 误 You should hear the teahcerfs advice. 正 You should listen to the teachefs advice. 析 hear多侧重于听到某事或某种声音，而 listen to则侧重于听的倾向性。如： We listen but hear nothing.例句为“ 听取某人意见” ，所以只能用listen tosomeones advice.little 误 There is a little water. Shall I get some? 正 Th

760、ere is little water. Shall I get some? 析 要注意中英文在同一问题上的表达法是不同的。如中文” 水不多了，我去取点吧。“ 英文要讲” 没水了，我去取点吧。”little smalllittle与small是近义词， 在作定语时常常可以互换， 如：a little girl或a small girl,但 little 一般不作表语，如： The car over there is small. 一句中不要用 little.作定语时little常常带有感情色彩，而 small则带有对比的含义。live 误 Tom lives with his parents*

761、 money. 正 Tom lives on his parents* money. 误 He lives on teaching. 正 He lives by teaching. 析 ” 靠吃某物为生” 应用live on something,而 live by是 靠某种生活手段为生” 。living aliveliving 侧重于生活得很好，身体不错，如： My grandfather is still living in hiseighties.而 alive则强调没有死而是活着的，如： Is that cat alive or dead?lonely 误 She wanted to d

762、o her homework lonely. 正 She wanted to do her homework alone. 析 lonely 意为“ 寂寞的 、“ 孤单的” , 如 ： The old man felt lonely, alone 则意为“ 独自的“ 、“ 单独的” , 如 ： He lives alone but he doesnt feel lonely.long 误 I have been studying long for the exam.nJnJnJnJnJnJ误正析误正析rLrLFLrLrLrLril call you as long as the book wi

763、ll be returned.ril call you as long as the book is returned.a s-a s引导的状语从句中可以用一般现在时表示将来。How long do you go to see your parents? Once a week.How often do you go to see your parents? Once a week.因为答语为每周一次所以问的是频率，要用how often.looklook for findlook fo r侧重于“ 寻找” 这个动作，如： What are you looking for?而 find则侧重于

764、结果，如： It is very difficult to find a jo b .这里不能用look fo r,因为真正困难的是 找到” 工作。 其他用法还有： 彳 列 He often looks back on his high school days. 析 look back on something 为“ 回顾“ 、“ 回想” 。 彳 列 I wish you wouldn*t look down on (upon) the childrens work. 析 look down on (upon)为“ 看不起” 某人或某事。 误 Im looking forward to see

765、 you. 正 Im looking forward to seeing you. 析 look forward to词组中的to是介词，所以其后要加名词或动名词，不能接不定式。lot 误 I can buy this dictionary now, because I have got much money. 正 I can buy this dictionary now because I have got a lot of money. 析much money多用于疑问句与否定句中， 而在肯定句中要用a lot of. lotsof与 alotof之间无多大区别， 两者都可以修饰可数与不

766、可数名词， 所以常常可以互换。 误 He is more happier now. 正 He is a lot happier now. 析 不可用more来修饰比较级，能修饰比较级的词有very much, a lot, lots,any, no, rather, a little, a bit 等。loud loudly这两个词含意相同，在日常用语中loud多与talk, speak, shout, laugh等动词连用，如 I： D on*t speak so loud, youll wake the baby.而在比较正式的场合才用loudly.loud aloudloud多指把声音放

767、大， 而aloud则指要出声不要默读。 如： -What did you say?-Oh, nothing, I was just think aloud.（ 我只不过自言自语。）Mmake 误 The little boy was made repeat the whole story. 正 The little boy was made to repeat the whole story. 误 The father made his son to do his homework from morning till night. 正 The father made his son do hi

768、s homework from morning till night. 析 make 的句型为“ make somebody do （ doing） something” . 但在被动语态中原来被省去的不定式符号to要被还原回来。 误 I always do this mistake. 正 I always make this mistake. 析 英语中do和 make是十分不易弄清的两个动词，do常用于谈论工作时或某种不确定的活动时，如： do a favour（ 帮个忙） ， do onds best（ 竭尽全力） ， dogood（ 有益） ， do harm（ 有害） ，而多数情况下

769、常用make,如： make a suggestion,make a cake, make a bed（ 收拾床） ，make a noise, make money 等等。 误 This wine was made of grapes. 正 This wine was made from grapes. 析 当成品制成后， 其原料的性质有所改变时应用make from ,否则用makeof, 如： This door was made of iron. 误 Hard work can often make up a lack of intelligence. 正 Hard work can

770、often make up for a lack of intelligence. 析 make up是“ 创造“ 、“ 编织 ，而 make up for是 弥补. . . 的不足之处” 。上句应译为“ 勤奋工作可以弥补天资的不足。” 误 We made up our mind to study hard. 正 We made up our minds to study hard. 析 mind这里是可数名词，使用时要特别予以注意make up one*s mind是下定决心” 之意。 误 Our class is made of twenty girls and twenty one bo

771、ys. 正 Our class is made up of twenty girls and twenty one boys. 析 make up of是” 某物由. . . 组成或构成” 。many 误 I have many friends. 正 I have a lot of friends. 析 many和 much多用于疑问句或否定句中，而在肯定句中则用处不多，尤其在非正式谈话中。如：-How much money have you got?-Ive got plenty. 误 You bought much too tomatoes. 正 You bought too many t

772、omatoes. 析 too many后接可数名词，too much后接不可数名词，而 much too后面接形容词，意为“ 太多” 。 误 For many a weeks it rained a lot. 正 For many a week it rained a lot. 析 many a 意为“ 好多“ 、“ 许多” ，但其后面要加单数名词Omatter 误 No matter what you did. 正 No matter what you did, I trusted you. 析 N。matter是个词组，意为“ 不论” ，它的语法功能是起连接作用，所以不能用于一个单独的句子

773、。it doesnt matter这个词组则不是一个连接词组，所以可以和一个单句连用，如：It doesnt mater what you say.（ 你说什么都不要紧。）maybe 误 May be he is right. 正 Maybe he is right. 析 maybe是副词，不要错用为may be.maybe perhaps这两个词的词意一样，maybe常用于非正式谈话，而 perhaps则多用在正式文体中。如： Maybe/Perhaps the weather will get better.而 Julius Caesar isperhaps the greatest of

774、 Shakespeares early plays.mend 误 I want to have my bike mended. 正 I want to have my bike repaired. 析 mend 意为“ 缝补” ， 如： My mother mended my coat.而 repair 是“ 修理mind 误 Could you mind to close the door? 正 Could you mind closing the door? 误 Try to make up your mind studying hard. 正 Try to make up your mi

775、nd to study hard. 析 mind用作动词时，其后加动名词；而用作名词意为“ 下定决心” 时，其后要加不定式。 要注意D o you mind if I smoke?的答语： 如果你不介意，应回答” No, go aheadJ如果你不想让对方吸烟，则应讲 Yes, please dont.miss 误 I found my bag missed. 正 I found my bag missing. 析 missing为形容词，其意为“ 不见了“ 、“ 丢了” 。在句中用作宾语补足语时不要误用m issed,它作动词时多为及物动词，要接名词或动名词，而不接不定式。如: I miss

776、ed the first train, I dont want to miss seeing the famous footballplayer.在作补足语讲某物， 不见了” 时有missing, gone, lost等， 如：I found mybag missing (gone, lost).mistake 误 I took your pen by wrong. 正 I took your pen by mistake. 析 by mistake是“ 错拿了“ 、” 误拿了“ 你的东西。wrong意为“ 错误” ，而 bymistake为“ 弄混了 。如： 误 If Fm not wron

777、g, you are Mr Brown. 正 If Pm not mistaken, you are Mr Brown.( 如果我没弄错的话，您是 Brown先生。) 误 The teachers always mistook me as my brother. 正 The teachers always mistook me for my brother. 析mistakefor是” 错把. . .当作. . .” 之意, 如：I took your book for mine.nJnJnJnJ误正析误正rLrLrLrLrLThis book is more better than that

778、 one.This book is much better than that one.不能用比较级来修饰比较级，而应用much, rather等来修饰比较级。More you read, more you learn.The more you read, the more you learn.no more than not morethanno more than 应译为“ 只不过“ 、 “ 才“ ，如： He wrote no more than three books.即他真正写了三本书。 而 not more than则意为 不会多于 ， 如：He wrote not moretha

779、n three books.即他写的书不会多于三本。 又如：He is no shorter than you.应译为 你和他都不矮 ，而 He is not shorter than you.才应译为 他比你高。”most 误 Most of students are good at English. 正 Most of the students are good at English. 正 Most students are good at English. 析 most of这一结构后面的名词前一定要有一个限定词。 误 My friends are most teachers. 正 My

780、 friends are mostly teachers. 析 mostly意为” 大部分的” ,“ 主要的” 。much 误 The boy was asleep very much. 正 The boy was fast asleep. 析 不是所有的形容词都可以用very来修饰，如fast asleep意为“ 熟睡 ，则是固定搭配。像 interesting, exciting, surprising这些形容词化而现在分词，以及tired, interested这些形容词化的过去分词则要用very来修饰。must 误 He must be in the office, and mustn

781、*t go home. 正 He must be in the office, and can*t go home. 析 must加动词原形为对事情的肯定推测，而否定的推测则要用cant加动词原形。 误 It must have rained now. 正 It must have rained yesterday. 析 ”must+have+过去分词” 为对过去发生事情的推测。这句话应译为“ 昨天一定是下雨 了 o 又如： I must go and call him. He must have forgotten it.must have tomust用来表示说话者觉得某件事有必要去做，如

782、 I must stop smoking.其意为：我自己认为我要戒烟； 而 have to则多用来表达由于来自外界的因素而不得不去做的事，如： I have to go to school tomorrow, must无过去式，当用在讲过去某件必须要做的事时要用had to ,如： When I was young, I had to go to thefactory.在否定句中mustnt意为： 一定不要做某事， 如：You mustnt tell this toTom.而 havent to 则多意为没有必要去做， 如 : You dont have to tell this to Tom

783、.而英语中多用neednt来取代havent to.myself 误 I cant play ping pong myself. 正 I can*t play ping pong by myself. 析 第一句并无语法错误，myself为 我亲自要去 ，而 by myself为 独自一人” 。 这句话要表达的意思是“ 我一个人无法打乒乓球。” 而I want to play pingpong myself.应译为“ 我自己想去打乒乓球。”Nname 误 She was named of a flower. 正 She was named after a flower. 析 以. . .命名应

784、为name after,又如给某人取名应为The father named hisson Tom.near 误 We came near to hit him. 正 We came near to hitting him. 析 这句话应译为“ 我们几乎要打他一顿。 near to 这一用法中to 为介词，其后要接宾语， 所以要接名词或动名词。 near作介词时其后可加to也可不加to,如： I sit near the door, I sit near to the fire.by nearWe lived near the city.与We lived by the city.两句话都是对的

785、， 但其表达的意义有所不同，by在表达距离时比near更近，所以by the city是紧靠近某城市。need 误 This room needs to clean. 正 This room needs to be cleaned. 正 This room needs cleaning. 析 在表达某事需要做什么时，need后面如用不定式要用其被动态，如接动名词则要用主动态。 误 We need not to do it. 正 We neednt do it. 析 need用在否定句、疑问句中一般用作情态动词，所以无人称变化也不加 t o ,而在肯定句中则多用作实意动词，如： We need

786、your help.neither 误 None of my parents is a teacher. 正 Neither of my parents is a teacher. 析 对两者的否定不能用none只能用neither, none用于三人以上的情况。 误 I dont do my homework. Neither he does. 正 I don*t do my homework. Neither does he. 析 这时应用倒装句。 误 Neither you nor I are right. 正 Neither you nor I am right. 析 neithern

787、or 这一句型在应用时其谓语动词应以邻近的主语一致。 误 Neither he studies nor plays. 正 Neither does he study nor play. 析 neither, hardly, seldom等否定词位于句首时，谓语动词采用倒装形式。never 误 Never I have broken my word. 正 Never have I broken my word.news 误 There are many news about the accident. 正 There is much news about the accident. 析 news

788、是不可数名词，它没有复数形式，如果讲一条新闻要用a piece ofnews.newspaper 误 I read the news on todays newspaper. 正 I read the news in todays newspaper. 析 在报纸上读到某一条新闻一定要用介词i n ,而on the newspaper是指把某物放于报纸之上，如： May I put the flower on this newspaper?night 误 I came home very late yesterday night. 正 I came home very late last ni

789、ght. 析 “ 昨晚” 一般要讲last night,而不应参照” 昨天上午、下午、傍晚” 的说法yesterday morning 等套用。no noneno是个限定词，它可以用在可数名词单复数或不可数名词前，如： No news isgood news.但如果名词前有另一限定词时则不能用no,而要用none of,如Noneof the students was here.no notNo one noneno one 与 nobody 样不能接 of 结构，如： No one wished me good luck.而要用 of 结构时要用 none,如： None of my fri

790、ends wished me good luck.nor 误 I never saw the painting before, or did I hear of it. 正 I never saw the painting before, not did I hear of it. 析 注意在表达“ 既不也不” 时不要用。 I作连词，而要用n o r,并且要用倒装语序。not 误 The students went to the park, but no the teachers. 正 The students went to the park, but not the teachers. 析

791、要使一个句子或一个句子的某一部分为否定时我们要用not,而不用no. 误 There is no my letter today. 正 There is no letter for me today. 析 n o 是一个限定词，用在名词前时，要注意这个名词前应没有冠词、物主代词或指示代词。 误 He not only was a writer but also an actor. 正 He was not only a writer but also an actor. 析 在这一句型中not only之后的词与but also之后的词类必须一致，否则应为错句。如果这一结构用在主语位置，则谓语

792、动词要与but also后面的主语保持一致，如： Not only you but also I am wrong.nothing 误 Nothing but books were sold here. 正 Nothing but books was sold here. 析 要注意真正的主语是nothing而不是books,所以这一结构在学生的使用中经常出错。 误 I have nothing to do but to cry. 正 I have nothing to do but cry. 析 在这一结构中but后面要用省to 的不定式。number 误 A number of news

793、can be heard on TV today. 正 A lot of news can be heard on TV today. 析 a number of后接用 数名词复数。 误 The number of students are ten thousand. 正 The number of students is ten thousand. 析a number o f 其意为“ 大量的” , 而 the number of是” 某 某 的 数 量 即 thenumber of students意为“ 学生人数” ，所以要用单数形式的谓语动词。0oclock 误 It*s ten pa

794、st five oclock. 正 Its ten past five. 析 oclock所表达的时间是正点，如果要表达的时间是几点几分或差几分几点都不能用oclock.once 误 Please come and see me once. 正 Please come and see me one day. 正 I met him once when I was a student.one 误 My grandfather wants to live for hundred years. 正 My grandfather wants to live for one hundred years.

795、 误 He threw away the old dictionary and wanted to buy new one. 正 He threw away the old dictionary and wanted to buy a new one. 误 His dog is bigger than my one. 正 His dog is bigger than mine. 析 一般物主代词之后不用o n e,除非one前有修饰词，如my old o n e ,否则要用名词性物主代词。 误 One of the teacher is in the office. 误 One of the

796、teachers are in the office. 正 One of the teachers is in the office. 析 One是句子的主语，其谓语动词应用单数，而 。 f 后面的名词要用复数名词。 误 One third of the books is sent to the students. 正 One third of the books are sent to the students. 析 几分之几或百分之几这一结构用在主语位置，其谓语动词要与。 f 后面的名词一致，如 Two thirds of the work is done.open 误 Are the b

797、anks opened today? 正 Are the banks open today? 析要注意open即可用作动词、 名词， 还可以用作形容词， 而 close则不同。请看： Are the banks closed today?这一句是正确的。or 误 He doesnt drink and smoke. 正 He doesnt drink or smoke. 析 否定句中的并列连词要用。 r 而不用and. 误 He neither drinks or smokes. 正 He neither drinks nor smokes.other 误 Where are the othe

798、rs students? 正 Where are the other students? 正 Where are the others? 析other作形容词时没有复数形式， 且作为泛指讲时没有定冠词， 如：Asksome other eople.而加定冠词后为特指。 the other可在句中作主语、宾语或定语, 如： Now let me show you the other.（ 宾语） He has two sons. One is a worker,the other is a teacher.（ 主语） others只能作代词，而 the others则为特指, 如:There ar

799、e five books. Two of them are not good. I like the others.out 误 She went out the classroom, taking a dictionary with her. 正 She went out of the classroom, taking a dictionary with her. 析 outof是指“ 从里出来” ，使用时不要将of丢掉。ppaper 误 Please give me two letter papers. 正 Please give me two sheets of letter paper

800、. 析 paper作为纸讲为不可数名词。 误 Each student must write paper on what he learned. 正 Each student must write a paper on what he learned. 析 这里的paper作为论文讲，是可数名词。p叩6 r的这种用法还可以用于证件、报纸、考卷等。parent 误 My parents and I are both interested in football. 正 My parents and I are all interested in football. 析 parents即为父母、双亲

801、，指两个人，加上自己为三个人，所以只能用all而不能用both.pass 误 The ship pasted the channel. 正 The ship passed the channel. 析pass为动词, 而past则为副词, 不要混淆， 如：My father has been ill forthe past two weeks. All the students passed the exam.pay 误 Please help me do this job, and I will pay for you later. 正 Please help me do this job

802、and I will pay you later. 析 为某工作彳寸给工人工资应为pay somebody,而 pay for something是为某物付款，如： You can buy all the things you want. Til pay for those.people 误 There are five hundred peoples here. 正 There are five hundred people here. 误 There is only one people. 正 There is only one person. 误 People there is frie

803、ndly. 正 People there are friendly. 析 people作为人讲时为及数名词，如要讲一个人应用one person,而不能用 people,讲若干人时用people而不能加s , 这样的用法还有police（ 警察） 等，这些概念用单数时要换其他的词. 如I： people a person; police - policemanpolicewoman; youth - a young man/woman.picture 误 There are some spots in the picture. 正 There are some spots on the pic

804、ture. 误 There is a young woman on the picture. 正 There is a young woman in the picture. 析 指溅落在画面上的灰尘，污罩I是。 n the picture,即讲与画面内容无关的东西用o n ,而 in the picture用于讲画面的内容。pity 误 What pity that her mother must always suffer! 正 What a pity that her mother must always suffer! 析 pity作为遗憾之事讲常加不定冠词；但要注意作为同情、怜悯讲则

805、不加冠词， 为不可数名词， 如：I feel pity for you.它还可以用作动词， 如：He pitiedthe poor people. 误 I have pity for you. 正 I have pity on you. 析 可怜某人时应用have (take) pity on somebody, 这是个惯用法。place 误 Last year he went to America. He travelled from place to another. 正 Last year he went to America. He travelled from place to pl

806、ace (from oneplace to another). 析 到处译为英文时为from place to place请不要在place之前加冠词。 这种用法在有些语法书中叫作零冠词用法，如： 一户挨一户为door by door,手拉手为 hand in hand. 误 The accident was taken place in that street. 正 The accident took place in that street. 析 take place为发生，它不能用于被动态，这样的词还有happen等。 误 There is no place in the bus. 正

807、There is no room in the bus. 析 room这里为不可数名词，意为空间，即没有地方了。place多指场所所在之地。 误 I came here to take place of Mr Smith. 正 I came here to take the place of Mr Smith. 析 take the place o f 意为代替、取代某人某事。play 误 D o you want to play guitar? 正 D o you want to play the guitar? 误 I like to play the bridge. 正 I like t

808、o play bridge( 桥牌) . 析 play作为玩讲时，在各种乐器前要加冠词， 在各种体育运动前则没有冠please 误 My friend pleased me to his birthday party yesterday. 正 My friend invited me to his birthday party yesterday. 析please作为动词时其词义不是请， 而是高兴、 愿意等意， 如：She alwaysdoes what she pleases.（ 她总是想做什么就做什么。） 又如： Ifs hard to please all.而 please作为请讲时为语

809、气词，多用于祈使句中，如 I： Please come in. 误 Both the teacher and the mother were pleased to the little girl. 正 Both the teacher and the mother were pleased with the little girl. 析 对某人表示满意、喜欢，应用be pleased with somebody.对某事感到高兴和满意时多用be pleased at或 about,但有时也可用w ith,却不能用of.pleasure 误 The boy gave his parents a l

810、ot of pleasures. 正 The boy gave his parents a lot of pleasure. 析 pleasure作为高兴、愉快、享乐、娱乐讲时为不可数名词。 误 It is pleasure to work with you. 正 It is a pleasure to work with you. 析pleasure作为一件或某件乐拿、 高兴之事讲时为可数名词， 如：It is oneof my pleasures.police 误 The police has not found the cause of the accident. 正 The polic

811、e have not found the cause of the accident. 析 police为复数名词，它没有单数形式。如果要讲一个警察 要 用 apoliceman, 两个要用 two policemen, 或 a policewoman, two policewomen.prepare 误 Im preparing the exam. 正 Im preparing for the exam. 析 prepare既是及物动词，又是不及物动词。作及物动词时其后面所跟的事物是正在 准备的；而作不及物动词时fo r后面的事物是目标。如： Fmpreparing for the exam

812、. 应译为我正在为考试做准备。同样的用法还有search与search for.present 误 D ont worry. I can present the meeting. 正 D ont worry. I can be present at the meeting. 析 present作为出席、在场讲时，是形容词而不应用作动词。其动词意为送给; 赠给; 提出，如： The reporter presented arguments of his idea.put 误 She put off her red dress and put on the green one. 正 She too

813、k off her red dress and put on the green on e. 析 与 put连用的介词很多， 一般来讲on与off是一对相反的意义的介词，如：turn on （ 打开） ， turn off（ 关上） ， 穿衣服是put on,但脱衣服却1只能用take off,而 putoff是推迟、使某人下车、关掉之意，如： They put off the exam becauset he national holiday.（ 因国家假日而推迟考期。） Could you put me off at the TownHa IL （ 请在市政厅让我下车。 ） Please

814、put off the wireless before you leave.（ 走之前请关掉无线电。）Rradio 误 There are two radioes in the classroom. 正 There are two radios in the classroom. 误 I heard the weather report through the radio. 正 I heard the weather report on the radio. 析 在收音机中听到某事应为hear something on the ra d io ,听收音机应为1isten to the radi

815、o.这样的用法还有电视，看电视为watch T V ,讲在电视上看见什 么节目为 watchon TV,如：Pm watching the football match on TV.但注意，作为 一种通信手段时应为 by radio,如：Police are talking to each other by radio.rain 误 There is a small rain falling. 正 There is a light rain falling. 误 There is a big rain. 正 There is a heavy rain. 析大雨在英文中应为a heavy rai

816、n, rain cats and do g s 为倾盆大雨， 小雨 为a light rain.千万不要讲a big rain或 a small rain.当作动词讲时,雨下得很 大可译为： It rains very much now/hard now/heavily now.reach 误 We reached to the town very late. 正 We reached the town very late. 析reach作为到达讲是及物动词， 而 arrive为不及物动 词。 但要注意reach的词组 搭配， 如 reach f o r ,为伸手去拿， 如：The thief

817、 reached for the gun. reachou t 伸出手，如： He reached out and took an interesting book.ready 误 You must ready at once. 正 You must be ready at once. 析 ready为形容词，而不像中文中准备为动词。remember 误 I didn*t remember closing the door, so the thief c ame into the room directly. 正 I didnt remember to close the door, so t

818、he thief came into the room directly. 析 remember其后接动名词，动名词所表示的动作已经做完， 如： I donftremember meeting you.其后如接不定式，不定式表达的动作还没有去做，如：D o remember to tur n off the light before you leave.rest 误 The rest of the students is girls. 正 The rest of the students are girls. 析 rest作剩余部分讲时，the rest of结构作主语时其谓语动词应与of后面

819、的名词的数保持一致。这种用法还有1/3 of, 80% of等。 误 The rest of the work are done. 正 The rest of the work is done.return 误 My friends returned back to their second home town . 正 My friends returned to their second home town. 析return即为返回， 所以back是多余的。 这句话还可以表述为：My friendswent back to their second home town.rice 误 We h

820、ad a few rice and some bread. 正 We had a little rice and some bread. 析 rice为物质名词，为不可数名词。ricenJ-IJnJ误正析_LrLrLc hnJnJ误正rLrLnJnJnJnJnJ_IJ析误正析误正rLrLrLrLrLrLWe had a few rice and some bread.We had a little rice and some bread,rice为物质名词，为不可数名词。The country is rich of oil.The country is rich in oil.be rich

821、in 为盛产. . .。The rich is not always happy.The rich are not always happy.形容词加定冠词表示一类人，作主语时要作复数看待。All his riches is no good to him if he is so ill.All his riches are no good to him if he is so ill. 析 riches为财富，是复数名词， 没有单数形式。 像这 样的词还有goods（ 货物） ，greens（ 青菜） ，manners（ 礼貌） 等。river 误 We like swimming on th

822、e river. 正 We like swimming in the river. 误 We like boating in the river. 正 We like boating on the river. 析 游泳用in the river,而在湖中划船要用on the river.room 误 There are already three people sitting on the sofa , please try to make a roomfor her. 正 There are already three people sitting on the sofa , please

823、 try to make roomfor her. 析room作为空间讲时为不可数名词。 leave room for 为给某人留点空地;make room for为让位给某人， 如： The young man made room for an oldwoman. 误 正 析 误 正斯 误 正 析I ran across with an old friend at the school gate .I ran across an old friend at the school gate,run across为偶然相遇。The truck ran across the cat.The tru

824、ck ran over the cat.run over为从. . . 上辗过。Yesterday I ran to a storm on my way home.Yesterday I ran into a storm on my way home,run into为撞上或撞在. . .上。safe 误 The brave man safed the boy from drowning. 正 The brave man saved the boy from drowning. 析 safe 是形容词，如： They wished him a safe journey, safely 是副词，

825、如:The young man drives his car safely.而 safety 是名词， 如：safety island（ 安全岛） ,Safety first!（ 安全第一! ） 但 save是动词。same 误 Yesterday I got a postcard. It is the same that you got the day beforeyesterday. 正 Yesterday I got a postcard. It is the same as you got the day before yesterday. 析 the same that意为唧是” ,

826、而 the same as才能译为 像. . . 一样的。” 误 Your book is not same as mine. 正 Your book is not the same as mine. 析 the same as中的定冠词不能少。say 误 His report wrote she is nineteen. 正 His report says she is nineteen. 析 中文中常讲 报告上写到“ 、“ 信上写到“ ，这样的“ 写” 在英文中要用say.say speak talk tellsea 误 As a boy his great ambition（ 抱负） w

827、as to go to the sea. 正 As a boy his great ambition was to go to sea. 析go to sea 为 去当水手、 海员” ； 而 go to the sea=go to the seaside,如：Hewant to go to the sea for his vacation.在“ 海中 游泳为 in the sea; at sea 为在“ 海上航行 ， 如：I have a brother at sea. bysea 为“ 坐船“ 、” 由海路运输” ，如： We travelled to New York by sea.sec

828、ond 误 I want to learn the second foreign language. 正 I want to learn a second foreign language. 析 当作为“ 第二“ 外语， ” 再增加一个” 时， 不要用the second而要用a second,the second强调排队的次序，a second强调再增加一个。see 误 He was seen leave the room. 正 He was seen to leave the room. 析see作主动态时用作to see somebody do something,而用作被动态时则是so

829、mebody to be seen to do something.要注意惯用法 let me see（ 让我想想） 。sheep 误 There are five sheeps on the grass. 正 There are five sheep on the grass. 析 sheep是单、复数同形名词，其他的还有： deer（ 鹿） ，fish（ 鱼） 等。ship 误 I travelled on a yacht. 正 I travelled on a ship （ in a yacht） . 析 虽然都是船，但游艇(yacht)要用in ,而 ship要用on.sick 误 T

830、he little boy was a ill boy. 正 The little boy was a sick boy. 析sick与 ill作表语时都表示“ 有病” 之意, 如：He feels ill.或 He feels sick.都对，但作定语时则只能用sick.since 误 He is living in Greece since 1978. 正 He has lived in Greece since 1978. 正 He has been living in Greece since 1978. 析由since引出的状语从句意为“ 自从” 某时一直如何， 主句要用完成时或完成

831、进行时。 误 She has been quite different since came back from America. 正 She has been quite different since coming back from America. 析 分词短语可以用在after, before, since等介词后面。sleep 误 The boy was very asleep. 正 The boy was fast asleep. 析 熟睡在英文中为fast asleep.非正式英语中一般不常用He* sleeping.而常讲 Hes asleep.其形容词 sleepy 是“

832、困倦的” , 如 ： I shall go to bed now. Tm sosleepy. ”臣卜铺 英国人讲sleeping c a r,而美国人讲sleeper.slow 误 Slow the door opened. 正 Slowly the door opened. 析slow与slowly的用法与意思相同， 在口语中和路标中多用slow,如：Tellhim to drive slower. Slow, dangerous bend.但是如果用在动词前还是要用 slowly.smile 误 She smiled to me. 正 She smiled at me. 析 冲着某人笑”

833、应为to smile at somebody.so 误 It is such beautiful a book that every child likes it. 正 It is such a beautiful book that every child likes it. 正 It is so beautiful a book that every child likes it. 析 关于so与such用法的区别有四种情况： 用于单数可数名词之前，其格式为“such+不定冠词+形容词+名词” ，而“ SO+形容词+不定冠词” 。 用于可数名词复数或不可数名词前， 只能用such,如：It

834、 is such good weather that wewant to go for a walk. They are such good students that they can pass the exameasily. 在只有形容词时只能用 s o ,如： It is so good that I like it very much. 利 many, much, few, little这四个词前只能用so而不能用sucho如：I have solittle money that I can*t buy the dictionary. 误 He got up early so as h

835、e could catch the first bus. 正 He got up early so as to catch the first bus. 正 He got up early so that he could catch the first bus. 正 He got up so earlyt hat he could catch the first bus.some 误 D o you have some lessone to prepare? 正 D o you have any lessons to prepare? 析 在疑问句或否定句中要用any; some多用在肯定句

836、中，如： I have somemoney to buy it.在请求， 或真心希望得到肯定答复时， 在疑问句中也要用some,如：Would youlike something to drink?即真心实意希望为对方提供饮料。 又如：Could you lendme some money?即真心想要借到钱。soon 误 The room as soon as became crowded. 正 The room soon became crowded. 析 soon 为“ 不久 、 很快 , 如： Fil be there very soon.而 as soon as 意为”. . .就.

837、. .” ， 如：Assoon as I finished my homework I went out to play football.sound 误 The report sounds well. 正 The report sounds good. 析 sound作动词时其后接形容词而不接副词，如： How sweet the musicsounds!sport 误 Are you going to run in the school sprot? 正 Are you going to run in the school sprots? 析sport用作可数名词单数时指具体的某项运动，

838、如：Basketball is an indoorsport.而在泛指” 运动“ 或” 运动会” 时要用其复数形式sports.spring 误 ril visit America in this spring. 正 ril visit America in spring. 正 Fil visit America this spring. 析 英语一年四季前如果有that, this, last, next等词，则其前面不要再加介词。这样的用法还有周、月、年等。请看下面句子中的用法有何不同： He toldme that she did it on the next day.这时是指过去某一天

839、的第二天，所以才有这种用法。如果以现在为时间基点的第二天应为Fil do it next day.start 析 start与leave 一样，其后接” for+目的地” 。begin startbegin 与 start 在很多场合下是一样的意思， 如：We started/began to study Englishtwo years ago.但在如下场合则不能用begin: 作为“ 启程” 讲， 如： I think weought to start at six. 表示“ 开始工作 ， 如：The car wont start.（ 车子发动不起来。） 作为“ 开动作 启动 讲, 如：

840、D o you know how to start this machine.still 误 Oh, it is still raining now. 正 Oh, it is still raining. 析 因st川即包含有现在仍然如何，所以now是多余词。still yet alreadystill 一般与动词连用，可放于句子中间用以说明过去开始的动作现在仍然在继续，特别用来表示我们希望它早点停止。如 I： Fve been thinking for hours, but Istill can*t decide, yet 一般放于句末， 用在疑问句与否定句中。 如：Has the post

841、mancome yet? already则与动词连用，可放于句中表示某事的发生比预期的要早，如： Ive already finished my homework.stop 误 When the teacher came into the classroom the students stopped to talk. 正 When the teacher came into the classroom the students stopped talking. 析 stop to do something 是 停下来去做某事 ，而 stop doing something 是停止做某事” 。s

842、treet 误 There is a narrow winding street from our village to the next one. 正 There is a narrow winding road from our village to the next one. 析 street 一般指城市中两旁有建筑物的“ 街道“ ，而 road多指乡间的” 路二nJnJnJict误正析chtrrLrLrLussYou ought to be strict to him.You ought to be strict with him.be strict with 是“ 对. . .严格的

843、“ 。 误 D o you want to have such a dictionary? 正 D o you want to have such a good dictionary? 正 D o you want to have a dictionary like that? 析 such作加强语气时一般是 such+（ 冠词） 形容词+ 名词” ，如： Ifs such agood book.但如果名词前没有形容词则要看其名词是否具有“ 能显示程度的含意” ，如： Fve got such a headache. You are such fools!否则在 such 与名词之间一定要有形

844、容词。sure 误 I am quite sure for that answer. 正 I am quite sure of that answer. 析sure用于句中表示” 对事有确实把握” 时应跟of或 about,而不跟for,如： Im sure about （ of） his ability to control this machine,sweet 误 Honey tastes sweetly. 正 Honey tastes sweet. 析sweet可以作为名词， 意为 糖果” , 是可数名词, 如：May I have a sweet?作形容词，如： The child l

845、ooked very sweet.而 sweetly为副词， 意为 甜美地” 、“ 悦耳地” 。要注意taste为感观动词，其后面要接形容词而不是副词。Ttake 误 This year I want to take the drivers license. 正 This year I want to get the drivers license. 析 take可以作为动词，意为“ 拿“ 、“ 取 ，如： I want to take my mail,而要获得某种证书、证明，要用get而不用take, take在学校范围内意为“ 参加“ 或“选修” 某些课程，如： This term I w

846、ant to take both French and Spanish. 误 The accident was taken place at the street corner. 正 The accident took place at the street corner. 析 take place与happen 一样作为“ 发生” 讲时没有被动语态。 误 D o you take me as a fool? 正 D o you take me for a fool? 析 takefoL意为 以为是” 、” 错当作” 、” 误认为 ，而这一意思还可以用于I took you to be the

847、 best friend.（ 我把你认作是最好的朋友。） 误 My English teacher was ill. Who will take place her? 正 My English teacher was ill. Who will take the place of her? 析 take the place of意为 取代talk 误 Yesterday I met an old friend. We talked many things. 正 Yesterday I met an old friend. We taked about many things. 析 talk是不

848、及物动词。team 误 Our team likes seeing film. 正 Our team like seeing film. 析 team与 family, class等词一样， 指整体时为单数名词。 如： Our team isexcellent,而指集体中的个体时要用作复数。ha nnJnJnJ误正析rLrLrLM onJnJTJ-I-误正误正析rLrLrLrLrLThey made fewer mistakes this term than they made last lerm.They made fewer mistakes this term than they did

849、 last lerm.当一个动作在同一个句子中重复时，第二次要用do来代替，以避免重You make me do more then anybody I know.You make me do more than anybody I know.I got into the restroom than someone knocked at the door.I got into the rest room then someone knocked at the door.than与then不要误用。he n 误 We went to the cinema, then went to a Chin

850、ese restaurant. 正 We went to the cinema, and then went to a Chinese restaurant. 正 We went to the cinema; then went to a Chinese restaurant. 析then作“ 然后” 讲时， 在 then前应加分号而不用逗号， 或加逗号用and then,但是如果是倒装句则要用逗号，如： First come Tom, then Mary.think 误 I think you are not right. 正 I dont think you are right. 析 th

851、ink在肯定句中与中文的习惯用法是一致的， 如： I think you are right.但在宾语从句是否定意思时，要否定think,如： I dont think you are right. 误 I think he will come here, do I? 正 I think he will come here, wont he? 析 think加宾语从句时，反意疑问句的主语应用宾语从句中的主语，助动词要用宾语从句中的助动词，而肯定还是否定要看主句中的情况决定：如主句用肯定句，则反意疑问句用否定句，反之亦然。 误 People think very high of his work

852、. 正 People think very highly of his work. 析 think highly of为 对某人某事评价很高” 。 误 When we talk about Chinese people we always think the Yellow River. 正 When we talk about Chinese people we always think about the Yellow River 析 think about意为“ 想起“ 、“ 想到” 。thousand 误 He got thousand of books from a second ha

853、nd book shop. 正 He got thousands of books from a second hand book shop. 析虽然 two thousand, three thousand 在 thousand 后都不加 s ,但 thousandsof则为“ 数千” ，该结构中一定要加Sothrough 误 I had a long distance call with John throught the telephone. 正 I had a long distance call with John on the telephone. 误 It took us two

854、 hours to walk across the forest. 正 It took us two hours to walk through the forest. 析 across是表示在一平面上进行的动作，而 through则是用在三维空间的动作。如： The river was frozen, so we could walk across it. I pushed through thecrowds to the entrance.throw 误 He threw a stone to me. 正 He threw a stone at me. 析 扔” 这个词表示方向时要注意他向

855、我扔石头是at m e ,我向他扔石头则为 to h im ,但 throw at 还有寻衅之意，如： Stop throwing stones at the cars.这时不要误用to. 正 I have been to America twice.too 误 This box is too heavy to lift it. 正 This box is too heavy to lift. 析 在toot。这一结构中，如果主语和不定式的宾语是一致的，则不要重复。 误 The child is too young not to go to school. 正 The child is too

856、 young to go to school. 析 to o -to 这一结构用来表示 太以致于不能” ，但下面的句子则不能照此翻译： Im too glad to meet you.应译为“ 我见到你真太高兴了” 。 误 There is much too noise. 正 There is too much noise. 析 much too+形容词 ，而too much+不可数名词” 。 误 You have bought too much tomatoes. 正 You have bought too many tomatoes. 析 too many后才加可数名词。also as w

857、ell too这三个词是近义词，但其用法各有不同。其一，too和 as well通常用于句末，如： She went to the cinema and her brother went too,而 also 则不用于句末，如：Fve also read her other novels.其二，这三个词都不用于否定句中，否定句中用not,either, 或 neither/nor， 如： He isnt here either.trousers 误 My trouser is getting smaller and smaller. 正 My trousers are getting smal

858、ler and smaller. 析 英语中trousers, pants, shorts（ 短裤） ，glasses（ 眼镜） 都要用复数形式。 误 This pair of glasses are very good. 正 This pair of glasses is very good. 析有了量词a pair o f,其后的谓语动词要与量词相一致。 如：two pairs of的谓语动词就要用复数。try 误 I tried to send her flowers but it didnt have any effect. 正 I tried sending her flowers

859、but it didnt have any effect.（ 我试着给她送花，但没有什么结果。） 误 Please try understanding it. 正 Please try to understand it. 析 ”try+动名词” 的意思是“ 试一试“ ，或“ 做某事看看会发生什么情况” ，而”try+不定式” 表示为达到目的要去做的事。Uunder 误 The lake is two meters under sea level. 正 The lake is two meters below sea level. 析 under的意思是在某物的下面，而below= lower

860、than,即“ 低于 。 误 Under the help of our teacher, all of us passed the exam. 正 With the help of our teacher, all of us passed the exam,understand 误 I think it is diffcult to make myself to understand. 正 I think it is diffcult to make myself understood. 析 这句话的意思是” 我想让别人理解我太难了” 。 误 I am understanding the

861、lesson now. 正 I understand the lesson now. 析understand 一词没有进行时态。 类似的词还有belong, find, hear, love, like等。until 误 We walked until the edge of the forest. 正 We walked as far as the edge of the forest. 误 Our school bus can hold until twenty children. 正 Our school bus can hold up to twenty children. 析unti

862、l与till两词的意思一样， 但两个词都只能用于时间， 如：rn wait untilI hear from you. 误 I waited fbr my mother to seven oclock, but she didnt come. 正 I waited fbr my mother until seven oclock, but she didn*t come. 误 Can you return this book until Monday? 正 Can you return this book by Monday? 析 当我们谈目前正在进行而将来某一时刻才停止的事件时用until,

863、而用by来表达将来某一时刻会发生的动作。 误 We arrived home until it became dark. 正 We didnt arrived home until it became dark. 析 until用于肯定句时表示” 某动作直到 为止 ，如： They worked until5 : 00P.M .用于否定句中时意为 直到才” 。所以用于肯定句中要使用延续性动词，但截止性动词却可以用在否定句中。upstairs 误 He went to upstairs. 正 He went upstairs. 析upstairs 一词可用作副词， 如：We all hurrie

864、d upstairs to see what happened.也可用宿名词， 如；The upstairs of the house needs painting.同时也可以用作形容词，如： A house with three upstairs rooms is quite good.use 误 It is no use to ask her. 正 It is no use asking her. 析 It is no use与There is no use后通常用动名词，而不用不定式。 误 ril get used to treat the students this way. 正 ri

865、l get used to treating the students this way. 析 be used to与get used to后要接动名词表示“ 习惯于 做某事。 误 I used to getting up early in the morning. 正 I used to get up early in the morning. 析 used to表示过去习惯的动作，其后要加动词原形。 误 Oil was used to cooking. 正 Oil was used to cook. 析 这里的句型虽然也是be used to但这里不是主动态，而是被动态，所以不能接动名词而

866、应接不定式。 析 used to 只能用来表示一种习惯，而不能用来表达某事发生的次数。Vvery 误 Thank you indeed. 正 Thank you very much indeed. 析 indeed用来修饰very much,但要放其后面，而且也不要单独使用。 误 The baby was very asleep. 正 The baby was fast asleep. 析 不是所有的形容词都可以用very来修饰，如： Im wide awake.（ 我全醒了。） 再如： all alone（ 十分孤独） ，much afraid 等。 误 The thing seems to

867、 be very improved. 正 The thing seems to be much improved. 析 有些语法书讲very修饰现在分词， 而 much修饰过去分词， 这要分别对待。如果过去分词是指一个具体的动作，而且是句中主要动词的一部分就必须用 much,而某些形容词化的过去分词， 还是要用very来修饰的， 如：I am verytired. 误 There is very less water in the river than usual. 正 There is much/far less water in the river than usual. 析 very不能

868、修饰形容词或副词的比较级，而要用far, much等来修饰。Wwait 误 Tomorrow I will wait you at the bus stop. 正 Tomorrow I will wait for you at the bus stop. 析 wait是不及物动词， 等人 要用wait for somebody；而 wait up为 不睡觉等候某事 ，如： Ill wait up tonight.walk 误 I think she went a walk yesterday. 正 I think she went out for a walk yesterday. 析 散步在

869、英文中要讲have a walk, take a walk.如果用go要用go for a walk.wa_ntLrLrLf eprLrLrL误正析水误正析nJnJnJonJnJnJwash 误 正 析watchThe flowers want to water.The flowers want watering.want在这里作为“ 需要” 讲，其后加动名词。这句话的意思是” 这花需要D o you want someone go along with you?D o you want someone to go along with you?want somebody to do some

870、thing 为一固定用法。Are you going to mak washing this weekend?Are you going to do washing this weekend?do washing为“ 洗衣服” ，是固定搭配。nJnJnJnJ析误正析rLrLrLrL一定要记住英文的习惯用法。The mother want to watch the children to play on the grass.The mother want to watch the children play （ playing） on the grass,watch的用法同see, hear等词

871、。way 误 Please move the chair, it is on the way. 正 Please move the chair, it is in the way. 析 in the way 为“ 挡道 ，而 on the way 为“ 在路上 ，如： on my way home（ 在回家路上） ， on his way to the station（ 在他去火车站的路上） 。 而 by the way是顺便说 ，如： By the way, have you heard from Joan recently? 误 The students were on their way

872、 to home. 正 The students were on their way home. 析 home在这里为副词。wear 误 The little girl is old enough to wear herself. 正 The little girl is old enough to dress herself. 析 wear后接衣物而不接反身代词。what 误 I want to know what to do it? 正 I want to know what to do? 误 I want to know how to do? 正 I want to know how t

873、o do it? 析 what是疑问代词，而how是疑问副词。要注意它们用法的不同。when 误 Id cook you nice meal when youd come home in the evening. 正 rd cook you nice meal when you came home in the evening. 析在 when引导的状语从句中， 要用一般时表示将来， 即主句中是将来时,从句中应用一般现在时，如主句中是过去将来时，从句中应用一般过去时。如：Fil be back when you come back from school. 误 When in the seco

874、nd grade, his mother bought him a bike. 正 When Tom was in the second grade, his mother bought him a bike. 析复合句中只有当主句的主语与从句的主语一致的情况下， 才有可能省略,如： When young he had to work all day. 误 Well go to the park when it doesnt rain tomorrow. 正 Well go to the park if it doesnt rain tomorrow. 析 if用来表示不能肯定的事如果发生会如

875、何；而 when用来表示肯定会发生或很可能会发生的事情，如： Ill see you in September when I come back. 误 I dont know when he comes home tomorrow. 正 I dont know when he will come home tomorrow. 析 when所引出的宾语从句如果是表示将来的动作要用将来时，而不是像时间状语从句中用一般时表示将来。where 误 I dont know where to go to. 正 I dont know where to go. 析 where是疑问副词。whether 误

876、It is unknown if he will come. 正 It is unknown whether he will come. 析 if不能引导主语从句。上句中it是形式主语，其后的从句才是真正的主语从句。要注意以下各种情况不宜用if而要用whether: I didnt know whether you11 ! go or not. （ 因句中有 or not 选项。） He didnt know whether to visit the old man.（ 因用于不定式前。） Im interested in whether hell go.（ 因作介词的宾语从句。）（ 4） I

877、 want to know the news whether our team will win.（ 同位语从句。） Let me know whether you can come.（ 此句如用if则含意有所不同，其意就变为“ 如果你能来请通知我” 。而用whether则意为 让我知道你是否能来、 ）who 误 Whom do you think would like to come for a game of football? 正 Who do you think would like to come for a game of football? 析在这个句式中 do you thin

878、k”应看作插入语， 所以原句应为Who would liketo come for a game of football? 误 From who was the gift? 正 From whom was the gift? 正 Who was that gift from? 析 在句首时现代英语常用who取代whom,而在紧跟介词时则不能用who来取代whom.why 误 Why not to go to the park? 正 Why not go to the park? 析 why not后面接不带to 的不定式，也可以用why dont you go with her?win 误 W

879、e have won your class. 正 We have beaten your class. 析w in是及物动词， 其后的宾语应是比赛、 战争、 奖品、 奖金， 如：Whichteam won the football match?而 beat 是指“ 打败” 对手、 敌人， 如：My brother beatmeat poker.（ 请注意， beat是不规则动词，其过去式与原形相同， 而过去分词为beaten.）wish 误 I hope you to be a good student. 正 I wish you to be a good student. 析hope不能加宾

880、语再加宾语补足语， 而 wish则可以， 如：I wish you luck.（ 我祝你走运。）without 误 I cant do this work well without you help me. 正 I can*t do this work well without your help. 析 without其后接动名词或名词而不接从高。work 误 This girl is looking for a work at the bank. 正 This girl is looking for a job at the bank. 析 ” 找工作” 一般应为to find a jo b

881、 ,而 works作为“ 工作” 讲为不可数名词，不能加不定冠词，也不可用复数。当work作为“ 作品“ 、“ 著作” 讲时，为可数名词， 如： This painting is one of his great works.而 works 作为“ 工厂” 讲时单复数形式相同，如： an iron works或 two iron works.作主语时其谓语动词可用单数，如 I ： The steel works is closed for the holidays.write 误 You may write with ink. 正 You may write in ink. 正 You may write with a pen. 析 ” 用写” 这一表达法要看用的是什么： 如果用钢笔则应用with,如：Please fill in this form with a pen.但讲用墨水时则要用 in.Yyesterday 误 I came across my old friend yesterday night. 正 I came across my old friend last night. 析 昨晚 应译为last night.